Sony DVD Recorder RDR HXD1070 User Manual

3-113-760-12(1)  
DVD Recorder  
Operating Instructions  
To find out useful hints, tips and information about Sony products and  
services please visit: www.sony-europe.com/myproduct  
RDR-HXD770/HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070  
© 2007 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
By ensuring these batteries are  
disposed of correctly, you will help  
prevent potentially negative  
consequences for the environment  
and human health which could  
otherwise be caused by  
inappropriatewaste handling ofthe  
battery. The recycling of the  
materials will help to conserve  
natural resources.  
• Do not attempt to replace or  
upgrade the hard disk by  
yourself, as this may result in  
malfunction.  
Precautions  
This equipment has been tested  
and found to comply with the  
limits set out in the EMC  
Directive using a connection  
cable shorter than 3 metres.  
If the hard disk drive should  
malfunction, you cannot recover  
lost data. The hard disk drive is  
only a temporary storage space.  
In case of products that for safety,  
performance or data integrity  
reasons require a permanent  
connection with an incorporated  
battery, this battery should be  
replaced by qualified service staff  
only.  
To ensure that the battery will be  
treated properly, hand over the  
product at end-of-life to the  
applicable collection point for the  
recycling of electrical and  
electronic equipment.  
About repairing the hard  
disk drive  
On safety  
Should any solid object or liquid  
fall into the cabinet, unplug the  
recorder and have it checked by  
qualified personnel before  
operating it any further.  
• The contents of the hard disk  
drive may be checked in case  
of repair or inspection during a  
malfunction or modification.  
However, the contents will not  
be backed up or saved by  
Sony.  
About the hard disk drive  
The hard disk has a high storage  
density, which enables long  
recording durations and quick  
access to the written data.  
However, it can easily be  
damaged by shock, vibration or  
dust, and should be kept away  
from magnets. To avoid losing  
important data, observe the  
following precautions.  
• Do not apply a strong shock to  
the recorder.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
location subject to mechanical  
vibrations or in an unstable  
location.  
• Do not place the recorder on  
top of a hot surface, such as a  
VCR or amplifier (receiver).  
• Do not use the recorder in a  
place subject to extreme  
changes in temperature  
(temperature gradient less than  
10 °C/hour).  
• Do not move the recorder with  
its mains lead connected.  
• Do not disconnect the mains  
lead while the power is on.  
• When disconnecting the mains  
lead, turn off the power and  
make sure that the hard disk  
drive is not operating (the  
clock is displayed in the front  
panel display for at least 30  
seconds and all recording or  
dubbing has stopped).  
• If the hard disk needs to be  
formatted or replaced, it will  
be done at the discretion of  
Sony. All contents of the hard  
disk drive will be erased,  
including contents that violate  
copyright laws.  
For all other batteries, please view  
the section on how to remove the  
battery from the product safely.  
Hand the battery over to the  
applicable collection point for the  
recycling of waste batteries.  
On power sources  
• The recorder is not  
For more detailed information  
about recycling of this product or  
battery, please contact your local  
Civic Office, your household  
waste disposal service or the shop  
where you purchased the product.  
disconnected from the AC  
power source (mains) as long  
as it is connected to the wall  
outlet, even if the recorder  
itself has been turned off.  
• If you are not going to use the  
recorder for a long time, be  
sure to disconnect the recorder  
from the wall outlet. To  
The manufacturer of this  
product is Sony Corporation,  
1-7-1 Konan Minato-ku  
Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan. The  
Authorized Representative  
for EMC and product safety  
is Sony Deutschland GmbH,  
Hedelfinger Strasse 61,  
70327 Stuttgart, Germany.  
For any service or guarantee  
matters please refer to the  
addresses given in separate  
service or guarantee  
disconnect the AC power cord  
(mains lead), grasp the plug  
itself; never pull the cord.  
On placement  
• Place the recorder in a location  
with adequate ventilation to  
prevent heat build-up in the  
recorder.  
• Do not place the recorder on a  
soft surface such as a rug that  
might block the ventilation  
holes.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
confined space such as a  
bookshelf or similar unit.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
location near heat sources, or  
in a place subject to direct  
sunlight, excessive dust, or  
mechanical shock.  
documents.  
• Do not move the recorder for  
one minute after you have  
unplugged the mains lead.  
,continued  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Do not place the recorder in an  
inclined position. It is  
• This Product includes  
FontAvenue fonts licenced  
About this manual  
®
designed to be operated in a  
horizontal position only.  
• Keep the recorder and discs  
away from equipment with  
strong magnets, such as  
microwave ovens, or large  
loudspeakers.  
by NEC corporation.  
FontAvenue is a registered  
trademark of NEC  
corporation.  
Check your model name  
The instructions in this  
manual are for 4 models:  
RDR-HXD770, RDR-  
HXD870, RDR-HXD970  
and RDR-HXD1070. Check  
your model name by looking  
at the front panel of the  
recorder.  
Copy guard function  
Since the recorder has a copy  
guard function, programmes  
received through an external  
tuner (not supplied) may contain  
copy protection signals (copy  
guard function) and as such may  
not be recordable, depending on  
the type of signal.  
• Do not place heavy objects on  
the recorder.  
On recording  
Make trial recordings before  
making the actual recording.  
• In this manual, the internal  
hard disk drive is written as  
“HDD,” and “disc” is used as a  
general reference for the HDD,  
DVDs, or CDs unless  
On compensation for lost  
recordings  
Sony is not liable and will not  
compensate for any lost  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
otherwise specified by the text  
or illustrations.  
Caution: This recorder is  
capable of holding a still  
video image or on-screen  
display image on your  
• Icons, such as  
, listed  
DVD  
recordings or relevant losses,  
including when recordings are  
not made due to reasons  
including recorder failure, or  
when the contents of a recording  
are lost or damaged as a result of  
recorder failure or repair  
undertaken to the recorder. Sony  
will not restore, recover, or  
replicate the recorded contents  
under any circumstances.  
at the top of each explanation  
indicate what kind of media  
can be used with the function  
being explained.  
television screen  
indefinitely. If you leave the  
still video image or on-  
screen display image  
displayed on your TV for an  
extended period of time you  
risk permanent damage to  
your television screen.  
Plasma display panels and  
projection televisions are  
especially susceptible to this.  
• Instructions in this manual  
describe the controls on the  
remote. You can also use the  
controls on the recorder if they  
have the same or similar  
names as those on the remote.  
• The on-screen display  
illustrations used in this  
Copyrights  
manual may not match the  
graphics displayed on your TV  
screen.  
• The explanations regarding  
DVDs in this manual refer to  
DVDs created on thisrecorder.  
The explanations do not apply  
to DVDs that are created on  
other recorders and played  
back on this recorder.  
• Television programmes, films,  
video tapes, discs, and other  
materials may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of  
such material may be contrary  
to the provisions of the  
If you have any questions or  
problems concerning your  
recorder, please consult your  
nearest Sony dealer.  
copyright laws. Also, use of  
this recorder with cable  
television transmission may  
require authorization from the  
cable television transmitter  
and/or programme owner.  
• This product incorporates  
copyright protection  
technology that is protected by  
U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision,  
and is intended for home and  
other limited viewing uses  
only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
About the HDMI Control functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre Sync  
(for HDMI connections only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD  
recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
®
(For analogue broadcasting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
,continued  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing from the Beginning of the Programme You Are Recording  
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another  
(Simultaneous Rec and Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
,continued  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Copying audio tracks (DISC t HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Copying an album (USB t HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
(USB t DVD-RW/DVD-R). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
t
DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . 120  
Copying JPEG image files to a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . . 121  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files, and DivX Video  
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Guide to Disc Types  
Recordable and playable discs  
Icon used  
Formatting  
(new discs)  
Compatibility with other  
DVD players (finalising)  
Type  
Disc Logo  
in this  
manual  
Select “Video Mode  
Off” in “HDD  
Recording Format”  
Dub HDD contents to a  
DVD (VR mode) to play  
on other DVD players  
VR  
mode  
Harddisk  
drive  
(internal)  
HDD  
Select “Video Mode  
On” (default) in  
“HDD Recording  
Dub HDD contents to a  
DVD (Video mode) to play  
on other DVD players  
Video  
mode  
Automatically  
formatted in +VR  
mode (DVD+RW  
VIDEO)  
Playable on DVD+RW  
compatible players  
(automatically finalised)  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RW  
+
RW  
Playable only on VR mode  
compatible players  
(finalisation unnecessary)  
VR  
mode  
Format in VR mode  
-
RWVR  
Playable on most DVD  
players (finalisation  
necessary) (page 45)  
Video  
mode  
Format in Video  
-
RWVideo  
DVD+R  
Automatically  
formatted in +VR  
mode (DVD+R  
VIDEO)  
Playable on most DVD  
players (finalisation  
necessary) (page 45)  
+
R
DVD+R DL  
Format in VR mode  
*1  
Playable only on DVD-R  
in VR mode compatible  
players (finalisation  
VR  
mode  
Formatting is  
performed in the  
“Format” setup  
DVD-R  
-
RVR  
necessary) (page 45)  
Automatically  
formatted in Video players (finalisation  
mode necessary) (page 45)  
Playable on most DVD  
DVD-R  
DL  
Video  
mode  
-
RVideo  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Usable disc versions (as of April 2007)  
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs  
• 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1,  
*2  
Ver.1.2 with CPRM  
)
• 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs  
• 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0,  
*2  
Ver.2.1 with CPRM  
)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double  
Layer) discs  
• 8x-speed or slower DVD-R DL (Dual  
*2  
Layer) discs (Ver.3.0 with CPRM  
)
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R  
DL,” “DVD-R,” and “DVD-R DL” are trademarks.  
*1  
When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into  
this recorder, it is automatically formatted in  
Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR  
mode, format in the “Format” setup (page 47).  
*2  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable  
Media) is a coding technology that protects  
copyrights for images.  
Discs that cannot be recorded on  
• DVD-RAMs  
,continued  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playable discs  
Icon used in  
this manual  
Type  
Disc Logo  
Characteristics  
Discs such as movies that can be  
purchased or rented  
DVD VIDEO  
This recorder also recognises DVD-  
RAMs* as DVD Video compatible  
discs.  
DVD  
VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in  
VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format  
VIDEO CD  
CD  
VCD  
CD  
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in  
music CD format  
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RAMs*  
containing MP3 audio tracks or DivX  
video files  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-ROMs  
containing MP3 audio tracks, JPEG  
image files or DivX video files  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
containing either MP3 audio tracks,  
JPEG image files or DivX video files  
“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” are trademarks.  
• DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/  
DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs that do not contain  
DVD Video, DivX video, JPEG image  
files, or MP3 audio tracks.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are  
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under  
license.  
• DVD Audio discs  
®
DivX is a video file compression technology,  
• Cartridge-only type DVD-RAMs.  
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs  
• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code  
(page 13).  
developed by DivX, Inc.  
* If the DVD-RAM has a removable cartridge,  
remove the cartridge before playback.  
• DVDs that were recorded on a different  
recorder and not correctly finalised.  
Discs that cannot be played  
• PHOTO CDs  
• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are  
recorded in a format different from the  
formats mentioned in the table above.  
• Data part of CD-Extras  
• BDs  
• HD DVDs  
• Discs recorded with an AVCHD-  
compatible DVD video camera  
Maximum recordable number of titles  
Disc  
Number of titles  
HDD*  
999  
99  
49  
49  
99  
DVD-RW/DVD-R  
DVD+RW/DVD+R  
DVD+R DL  
DVD-R DL  
* The maximum length for one title is 12 hours.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
     
b Notes  
Note on playback operations of DVD  
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs  
• Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-  
Rs, DVD-RAMs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be  
played on this recorder due to the recording  
quality or physical condition of the disc, or the  
characteristics of the recording device and  
authoring software. The disc will not play if it has  
not been correctly finalised. For more  
information, see the operating instructions for the  
recording device.  
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the  
same DVD-RW. To change the disc’s format,  
reformat the disc (page 47). Note that the disc’s  
contents will be erased after reformatting.  
• You cannot shorten the time required for  
recording even with high-speed discs.  
• It is recommended that you use discs with “For  
Video” printed on their packaging.  
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD+Rs,  
DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (Video mode) that  
contain recordings made on other DVD  
equipment.  
• In some cases, you may not be able to add new  
recordings to DVD+RWs that contain recordings  
made on other DVD equipment. If you do add a  
new recording, note that this recorder will rewrite  
the DVD menu.  
Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/  
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by  
software producers. Since this recorder plays  
DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the  
disc contents the software producers  
designed, some playback features may not be  
available. See the instructions supplied with  
the DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs.  
Region code (DVD VIDEO only)  
Your recorder has a region code printed on  
the rear of the unit and will only play DVD  
VIDEOs (playback only) labelled with  
identical region codes. This system is used to  
protect copyrights.  
DVD VIDEOs labelled  
on this recorder.  
will also play  
ALL  
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the  
message “Playback prohibited by region  
code.” will appear on the TV screen.  
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region  
code indication may be labelled even though  
playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by  
area restrictions.  
• You cannot edit recordings on DVD+RWs,  
DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs  
that are made on other DVD equipment.  
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by  
this recorder, the data may be erased.  
Region code  
• You may not be able to record, edit, or dub on  
some recordable discs, depending on the disc.  
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or  
played on this recorder. This may cause the  
recorder to malfunction.  
Music discs encoded with copyright  
protection technologies  
This product is designed to play back discs  
that conform to the Compact Disc (CD)  
standard.  
Recently, various music discs encoded with  
copyright protection technologies are being  
marketed by some record companies. Please  
be aware that among those discs, there are  
some that do not conform to the CD standard  
and may not be playable by this product.  
Note on DualDiscs  
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which  
mates DVD recorded material on one side  
with digital audio material on the other side.  
However, since the audio material side does  
not conform to the Compact Disc (CD)  
standard, playback on this product is not  
guaranteed.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Hookups and Settings  
Hooking Up the Recorder  
Follow steps 1 through 6 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder. Do not connect the  
b Notes  
• See “Specifications” (page 160) for a list of supplied accessories.  
• Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.  
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.  
• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack.  
• Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting.  
Checking hookup and setting methods  
The recorder incorporates both analogue and digital tuners. The programme guide and timer  
recording method differ depending on which one you select. Depending on the broadcasts you  
are receiving and your equipment, select one of the following aerial hookups. Do NOT set  
“LINE 1 In” to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137) when making connection B.  
When you receive  
Hookup  
Programme guide  
Timer recording using  
programme guide  
Freeview  
Digital Service  
Satellite, Cable  
Terrestrial  
b Note  
Beginning in 2008, analogue broadcasts in the UK will end area by area, with all analogue broadcasts  
scheduled to end by 2012. After analogue broadcasts end in your area, you will not be able to use hookup C  
to view TV broadcasts. At that time, change to hookup A to view digital broadcasts.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box  
Controller  
If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals  
This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals, connect  
the TV SCART connector on the set top box receiver to the LINE 1/DECODER jack, and set  
“LINE 1 In” to “RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137). See the instructions supplied  
with the set top box receiver.  
Using the set top box receiver control function  
The set top box receiver control function can be used with hookup B. It allows the recorder to  
control a set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller. The recorder controls  
programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording. You can also use the  
recorder’s remote control to change programme positions on the set top box receiver whenever  
the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on.  
To use the set top box receiver control function, you need to connect the set top box controller  
(page 17). After setting up the set top box receiver control, check that the recorder can correctly  
control the set top box receiver (page 28).  
b Notes  
• If your aerial is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead cable), use an external aerial connector (not supplied) to  
connect the aerial to the recorder.  
• If you have separate cables for AERIAL antennas, use an AERIAL UHF/VHF band mixer (not supplied)  
to connect the aerial to the recorder.  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected  
set top box receiver.  
,continued  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting)  
Use this hookup if you can receive Freeview.  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position  
on the recorder.  
Wall  
TV  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT  
to DIGITAL AERIAL IN  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
If you want to view both analogue and digital broadcasts  
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analogue TV  
broadcasts.  
Wall  
TV  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
to ANALOG AERIAL IN  
to DIGITAL AERIAL IN  
to DIGITAL  
AERIAL OUT  
Aerial cable (not supplied)  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL OUT  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting)  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver.  
To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the  
aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver.  
Place the set top box controller  
near the remote sensor on the  
set top box receiver.  
Wall  
Set top box  
controller  
Set top box  
receiver  
ANT IN  
SCART cord*2  
TO TV  
(not supplied)  
Aerial cable*1  
(not supplied)  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL IN  
to G-LINK  
DVD recorder  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL OUT  
TV  
Aerial cable  
(supplied)  
to aerial input  
: Signal flow  
*1  
If your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack, connect the aerial to the recorder’s  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack.  
Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector.  
*2  
,continued  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting)  
Use this hookup if you watch cable programme positions without a set top box receiver. Also  
use this hookup if you are only connecting an aerial antenna.  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position  
on the recorder.  
Wall  
to ANALOG AERIAL IN  
DVD recorder  
to ANALOG AERIAL OUT  
TV  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord  
Select one of the following patterns, A through E, according to the input jack on your TV  
monitor, projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable  
you to view pictures.  
B
A
TV  
Audio/video  
cord (not  
supplied)  
TV, projector, or  
audio component  
to LINE 2 OUT  
(VIDEO)  
SCART cord (not supplied)  
(yellow)  
to T LINE 3 – TV  
DVD recorder  
to LINE 2 OUT  
(S VIDEO)  
to HDMI OUT  
(blue)  
(red)  
(green)  
to COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
HDMI cord  
(not supplied)  
Component video  
cord (not supplied)  
(blue)  
(red)  
(green)  
C
D
E
TV, projector, or audio  
component  
TV, projector, or audio  
component  
TV, projector, or audio  
component  
: Signal flow  
,continued  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Insert the HDMI connector straight into  
the HDMI jack.  
Do not bend or apply pressure to the  
HDMI connector.  
A SCART input jack  
When setting “LINE 3 Out” to “S-Video” or  
“RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup  
(page 136), use a SCART cord that conforms  
to the selected signal.  
B Video input jack  
You will enjoy standard quality images.  
C S VIDEO input jack  
You will enjoy high quality images.  
D Component video input jacks (Y, PB/CB,  
PR/CR)  
You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction  
and high quality images.  
If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p  
format signals, use this connection and set  
“Progressive” to “Compatible” in the “Easy  
Setup” setup (page 26). Then set  
“Component Video Out” to “Progressive” in  
the “Video In/Out” setup to send progressive  
video signals. For details, see “Component  
b Notes  
• Be sure to disconnect the HDMI cord when  
moving the recorder.  
• Do not apply too much pressure to the cabinet  
wall, if you place the recorder on the cabinet with  
the HDMI cord connected. It may damage the  
HDMI jack or the HDMI cord.  
• Do not twist the HDMI connector while  
connecting to or disconnecting from the HDMI  
jack to avoid damaging the HDMI jack and  
connector.  
When playing “wide screen” images  
Some recorded images may not fit your TV  
screen. To change the picture size, see  
E HDMI input jack  
Use a certified HDMI cord (not supplied) to  
enjoy high quality digital picture and sound  
through the HDMI OUT jack.  
If you are connecting to a VCR  
Connect your VCR to the LINE 1/  
DECODER jack on the recorder (page 31).  
When connecting a Sony TV that is  
compatible with the HDMI control function,  
To see the signals from the connected set top  
box receiver when the set top box receiver is  
connected to the recorder using a SCART  
cord only, turn the recorder on.  
b Notes  
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord  
between the recorder and your TV at the same  
time.  
• Do not make connections A and E at the same  
time.  
When connecting to the HDMI jack  
Follow the steps below. Improper handling  
may damage the HDMI jack and the  
connector.  
• When you connect the recorder to your TV via the  
SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to the  
recorder automatically when you start playback.  
If necessary, press the TV t button on the  
remote to return the input to the TV.  
• If you connect the recorder to a TV with  
SMARTLINK, set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in  
the “Video In/Out” setup.  
• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack  
(connection E) to DVI jacks that are not HDCP  
compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).  
• Component video and RGB signals are not output  
when using the HDMI connection.  
1
Carefully align the HDMI jack on the  
rear of the recorder and the HDMI  
connector by checking their shapes.  
Make sure the connector is not upside  
down or tilted.  
* This DVD recorder incorporates High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Connector is upside down  
Not straight  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About the SMARTLINK  
features (for SCART  
connections only)  
About the HDMI Control  
functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre  
Sync (for HDMI connections  
only)  
If the connected TV (or other connected  
equipment such as a set top box) complies  
By connecting Sony components that are  
compatible with the HDMI Control function  
with an HDMI cord (not supplied), operation  
is simplified as below:  
• One-Touch Play (page 81)  
• System Power-Off  
When you turn the TV off by using the  
power button on the TV’s remote, the  
components compatible with the HDMI  
Control function turn off automatically.  
*3  
with SMARTLINK, NexTView Link  
,
*1  
*2  
MEGALOGIC , EASYLINK  
,
*2  
*3  
CINEMALINK , Q-Link , EURO VIEW  
*4  
*5  
LINK , or T-V LINK , you can enjoy the  
following SMARTLINK features.  
• TV Direct Rec. (page 37)  
• One-Touch Play (page 81)  
• Preset Download  
You can download the tuner preset data  
from your TV to this recorder, and tune the  
recorder according to that data in “Easy  
Setup.”  
• NexTView Download  
You can easily set the timer by using the  
NexTView Download function on your TV.  
To prepare for the ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre Sync  
features  
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” in the “HDMI  
Output” setup (page 148). For details on TV  
settings, refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the TV.  
To prepare for the SMARTLINK features  
Set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in the “Video  
In/Out” setup (page 136) and  
“SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder Only” in  
the “Options” setup (page 150).  
b Notes  
• Depending on the connected component, the  
HDMI Control function may not work. Refer to  
the operating instructions supplied with the  
component.  
• The recorder supports only the playback option of  
HDMI Control. “Player” appears on the TV  
screen when using the HDMI Control functions.  
b Notes  
• For correct SMARTLINK connection, you will  
need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins.  
Refer to your TV’s instruction manual as well for  
this connection.  
• Not all TVs respond to the functions above.  
*1  
“MEGALOGIC” is a registered trademark of  
Grundig Corporation.  
“EASYLINK” and “CINEMALINK” are  
*2  
trademarks of Philips Corporation.  
“Q-Link” and “NexTView Link” are trademarks  
*3  
of Panasonic Corporation.  
“EURO VIEW LINK” is a trademark of Toshiba  
*4  
Corporation.  
“T-V LINK” is a trademark of JVC Corporation.  
*5  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord  
Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,  
projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to listen  
to sound.  
[Speakers]  
[Speakers]  
Rear (L)  
A
Rear (R)  
Audio component with  
a decoder  
Front (L)  
Front (R)  
Centre  
Subwoofer  
or  
to coaxial/HDMI digital input  
HDMI cord  
(not supplied)  
Coaxial digital cord  
(not supplied)  
to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)  
to HDMI OUT  
to LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)  
DVD recorder  
INPUT  
B
VIDEO  
(white)  
(yellow)  
L
(red)  
(white)  
AUDIO  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
R
(yellow)*  
(red)  
TV, projector, or  
audio component  
: Signal flow  
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 19).  
If you connect a Sony audio component that  
is compatible with the HDMI control  
function, refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the audio component.  
A Digital audio input jack  
*1  
If your audio component has a Dolby  
*2  
Digital, DTS , or MPEG audio decoder and  
a digital input jack, use this connection. You  
can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS  
(5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround  
effects.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
B Audio L/R (left/right) input jacks  
This connection will use your TV’s or audio  
component’s two speakers for sound.  
Step 4: Connecting the  
Mains Lead  
z Hint  
For correct speaker location, see the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected  
components.  
Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN  
terminal of the recorder. Then plug the  
recorder and TV mains leads (AC power  
cords) into the mains. After you connect the  
mains lead, you must wait for a short  
while before operating the recorder.  
You can operate the recorder once the front  
panel display lights up and the recorder enters  
standby mode.  
b Notes  
• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to  
the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) jacks at the same  
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come  
from your TV’s speakers.  
• With connection B, do not connect the LINE IN  
(R-AUDIO-L) and LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)  
jacks to your TV’s audio output jacks at the same  
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come  
from your TV’s speakers.  
If you connect additional equipment to this  
recorder (page 31), be sure to connect the  
mains lead after all connections are complete.  
• With connection A, after you have completed the  
connection, make the appropriate settings in the  
“Audio Out” setup (page 138). Otherwise, no  
sound or a loud noise will come from your  
speakers.  
• When you connect the recorder to an audio  
component using an HDMI cord, you will need to  
do one of the following:  
– Connect the audio component to the TV with  
the HDMI cord, or  
– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video  
cord other than HDMI cord (component video  
cord, S-video cord, or audio/video cord).  
to AC IN  
to mains  
1
2
*1  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered  
*2  
trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Controlling TVs with the  
remote  
Step 5: Preparing the  
Remote  
You can adjust the remote’s signal to control  
your TV.  
You can control the recorder using the  
supplied remote. Insert two R6 (size AA)  
batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on  
the batteries to the markings inside the  
battery compartment. When using the  
b Notes  
• Depending on the connected unit, you may not be  
able to control your TV with some or all of the  
buttons below.  
remote, point it at the remote sensor  
recorder.  
on the  
• If you enter a new code number, the code number  
previously entered will be erased.  
Number  
buttons  
TV/DVD  
b Notes  
• If the supplied remote interferes with your other  
Sony DVD recorder or player, change the  
command mode number for this recorder  
DISPLAY  
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible  
leakage and corrosion. Should leakage occur, do  
not touch the liquid with bare hands. Observe the  
following:  
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or  
batteries of different manufacturers.  
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.  
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an  
extended period of time, remove the batteries.  
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid  
inside the battery compartment, and insert new  
batteries.  
x
TV [/1  
TV t  
TV 2 +/–  
TV PROG  
+/–  
1 Hold down TV [/1 located at the  
bottom of the remote.  
Do not press the [/1 button at the top of  
the remote.  
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked  
the front panel) to strong light, such as direct  
on  
sunlight or a lighting apparatus. The recorder may  
not respond to the remote.  
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the  
code number and Command Mode may be reset  
to the default setting. Set the appropriate code  
number and Command Mode again.  
2 With TV [/1 pressed down, enter the  
TV’s manufacturer code using the  
number buttons.  
For instance, to enter “09,” press “0” then  
“9.” After you enter the last number,  
release the TV [/1 button.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Code numbers of controllable TVs  
If more than one code number is listed,  
try entering them one at a time until you  
find the one that works with your TV.  
To operate the TV/DVD button  
(for SCART connections only)  
The TV/DVD button switches between TV  
mode and DVD mode. Press the TV/DVD  
button when in stop mode or no menu appears  
on the TV screen. Point your remote at the  
recorder when using this button.  
Manufacturer  
Sony  
Code number  
01 (default)  
TV mode: switch to this when you use the  
TV’s tuner mainly. When you start playback,  
the input source for the TV is set to the  
recorder automatically.  
DVD mode: switch to this when you use the  
recorder’s tuner mainly.  
Grundig  
Hitachi  
ITT/Nokia  
JVC  
11  
24  
15, 16  
33  
Loewe  
45  
To check the current mode, press DISPLAY  
(page 40).  
Nokia  
69, 73  
17, 49  
06, 07, 08, 72  
12, 13, 74  
22, 23, 71  
25  
Panasonic  
Philips  
If you have a Sony DVD player  
or more than one Sony DVD  
recorder  
Saba  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
If the supplied remote interferes with your  
other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the  
command mode number for this recorder and  
the supplied remote to one that differs from  
the other Sony DVD recorder or player after  
you have completed “Step 6: Easy Setup.”  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.  
You can check the current Command Mode  
in the front panel display. For details, see  
page 149.  
Sharp  
29  
Telefunken  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
36  
43, 75  
38  
The remote performs the following:  
Buttons  
Operations  
TV [/1  
Turns your TV on or  
off.  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.  
The remote does not function if different  
command modes are set for the recorder and  
remote. Set the same command mode.  
TV 2 (volume) Adjusts the volume  
+/–  
of your TV.  
TV PROG +/–  
Selects the  
programme position  
on your TV.  
TV t (input  
select)  
Switches your TV’s  
input source.  
,continued  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Changing programme positions  
of the recorder using the  
remote  
Step 6: Easy Setup  
Make the basic adjustments by following the  
on-screen instructions in “Easy Setup.”  
Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit  
the “Easy Setup” function during this  
procedure.  
You can change programme positions of the  
recorder using the number buttons.  
[/1  
Number  
buttons  
INPUT  
GUIDE  
ENTER  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
O
Example: for channel 50  
Press “5,” “0,” then press ENTER.  
TV [/1  
z Hint  
If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL  
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks, you  
can switch between digital mode and analogue  
mode using the INPUT button.  
1 Turn on the recorder and your TV.  
Then switch the input selector on your  
TV so that the signal from the recorder  
appears on your TV screen.  
The “Language” display appears.  
• If the “Language” display does not  
appear, select “Easy Setup” in the  
“Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in  
the System Menu (page 130).  
2 Select a language for the on-screen  
displaysusing </M/m/,, and press  
ENTER.  
The initial settings message appears.  
3 Select “Start” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to  
make the following settings.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
D.TV Auto Channel Setting  
Clock Setting  
If the aerial cable is connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup A),  
select “Auto Scan.” Then, select your  
country/region using </,, and press  
ENTER. The recorder will automatically  
capture and store the available TV and  
Radio channels.  
The recorder will automatically set the  
clock when any digital channels have  
been scanned and stored. Go to the “EPG  
Type Select” setting.  
Select “Auto” when a programme  
position in your local area broadcasts a  
time signal. The “Auto Clock Setting”  
display appears.  
If the aerial cable is connected to the  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B  
or C), select “Do not set.”  
1
Select the programme position of the  
station that carries a time signal  
using </,.  
For details, see page 15.  
2
Select “Start” using m, and press  
ENTER.  
If a clock signal cannot be found,  
press O RETURN, and set the  
clock manually.  
A.TV Auto Channel Setting  
If the aerial cable is connected to the  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B  
or C) and the TV is connected to this  
recorder not using SMARTLINK, select  
“Auto Scan.” Then, select your country/  
region using </,, and press ENTER.  
The programme position order will be set  
according to the country/region you set.  
Select “Manual” to set the clock  
manually. The “Manual Clock Setting”  
display appears.  
1
2
3
Select the time zone for your area  
using </,, and press m.  
If the aerial cable is connected to the  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B  
or C) and the TV is connected to this  
recorder with SMARTLINK, select  
“Download from TV” (For details, refer  
to the operating instructions supplied  
with your TV). Then, select your  
country/region using </,, and press  
ENTER. The tuner preset data will be  
downloaded from your TV to this  
recorder.  
Select “On” if you are now on  
summer time, and press ENTER.  
Set the day, month, year, hour, and  
minutes using </M/m/,, and  
press ENTER to start the clock.  
EPG Type Select  
Select the EPG (Electronic Programme  
Guide) type to use.  
If no programme positions for digital  
broadcasts are found after scanning, the  
“EPG Type Select” display does not  
appear. The EPG type is automatically  
set to the country/area you select when  
setting the program positions.  
For details, see page 15.  
If the aerial cable is connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup A)  
only, or to skip this setting, select “Do  
not set.” Then, select your country/region  
using </,, and press ENTER.  
To set the programme positions  
,continued  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select “Guide (Digital)” to use the digital  
electronic programme guide (see “Guide  
Select “Guide (Digital)” if you receive  
only digital broadcasts.  
Setting up your set top box  
receiver for the GUIDE Plus+  
system (For analogue  
broadcasting)  
®
Follow the steps below to set up the GUIDE  
Plus+ system and set top box controller. The  
GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the UK  
only.  
1 Press GUIDE.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Basic Setup”  
appears.  
Select “GUIDE Plus+” to use the  
Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ electronic  
programme guide (see “GUIDE Plus+  
TV Screen Size (page 144)  
If you have a wide-screen TV, select  
“Wide (16:9).” If you have a standard  
TV, select “Standard (4:3).” This will  
determine how “wide-screen” images are  
displayed on your TV.  
For users other than in the UK, go to  
step 4.  
Progressive  
When you connect a progressive format  
TV to this recorder using the  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks,  
select “Compatible.”  
2 Select “Postal Code,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Enter your postal code using </M/m/  
HDD caution messages  
Read the HDD caution messages, and  
press ENTER.  
,, and press ENTER.  
If “Country” is set to “Others,” you  
cannot enter a postal code and the  
GUIDE Plus+ system will not search for  
a host channel.  
4 Select “Finish Setup” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
“Easy Setup” is completed.  
4 Select “External Receiver 1,” and  
press ENTER.  
You can also select “External Receiver  
2” or “External Receiver 3” if you have  
connected additional set top box  
receivers.  
To return to the previous step  
Press O RETURN.  
z Hint  
If you want to run “Easy Setup” again, select “Easy  
Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in  
the System Menu (page 130).  
5 Press ENTER to select “Continue.”  
6 Select the set top box receiver type  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
7 Select the provider using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
8 Select the receiver brand using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
If you cannot get the recorder to control  
your set top box receiver  
Check the connection and position of the set  
top box controller (page 17).  
If your set top box receiver still does not  
operate with this recorder, refer to the  
instructions supplied with your set top box  
receiver and contact your cable or satellite  
company to see if they can provide you with  
a compatible set top box receiver.  
If you select “Other providers,” you can  
select a receiver brand from a list of all  
available brands.  
If your receiver brand is not on the list,  
select “???.”  
The receiver brand list is automatically  
updated, so your receiver may be  
available at a later date. Select your brand  
when it becomes available. Until then,  
use “???.”  
b Notes  
• The list of external receivers controllable by the  
GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and is  
distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data  
signals. Since the time your recorder has been  
produced and the time you installed your recorder  
for the first time, new external receiver codes  
might have been added.  
• If the external receiver is still not on the list or is  
not controlled properly by the recorder, please  
call Customer Support to report the brand and  
model of your external receiver.  
9 Select the connection you used for  
your set top box receiver using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
When the set top box receiver is  
connected to the recorder using hookup  
B with both an aerial cable and a SCART  
cord, select either “Line1” or “Antenna.”  
The display asks for confirmation.  
10 Press ENTER to select “Continue.”  
The Video Window switches to the  
specified programme position.  
To fix the set top box controller to your set  
top box receiver  
Once you have confirmed that the set top box  
controller controls your set top box receiver,  
fix it in place.  
11 Select “YES” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
If the Video Window does not switch to  
the specified programme position, select  
“NO” and press ENTER until the Video  
Window switches to the specified  
programme position.  
1
Remove the backing on the double-sided  
tape.  
To receive GUIDE Plus+ system data  
your recorder must be turned off  
when not in use. If your recorder is  
connected to a set top box receiver, be  
sure to leave the set top box receiver  
turned on. After initial setup, it may  
take up to 24 hours to begin receiving  
TV programme listings.  
2
Attach it so that the set top box controller  
is directly above the remote control  
sensor on your set top box receiver.  
b Note  
You cannot set tuner system or “OSD  
Language” to a country/region or language  
that is not supported by the GUIDE Plus+  
system.  
,continued  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the basic GUIDE Plus+ settings  
1
Press GUIDE.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home  
Screen” appears.  
2
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar using M/  
,, and press ENTER.  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
3
4
Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Repeat from step 2 of “Setting up your  
set top box receiver for the GUIDE  
Plus+ system (For analogue  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device  
After disconnecting the recorder’s mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar  
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder.  
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack)  
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.  
Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack  
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 1/DECODER jack of this recorder.  
VCR  
TV  
SCART cord (not supplied)  
to SCART input  
to i LINE 1/DECODER  
to T LINE 3 – TV  
DVD recorder  
b Notes  
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.  
• If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.  
DVD recorder  
VCR  
TV  
Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch  
video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.  
Line input 1  
VCR  
DVD recorder  
TV  
Line input 2  
• The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder’s LINE 1/  
DECODER jack.  
• To watch the connected VCR or similar device’s pictures through the recorder while the recorder is in  
standby mode, set “Power Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic” setup (page 130).  
• When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the  
TV/DVD button on the remote.  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected  
VCR.  
,continued  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel  
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the  
equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord.  
VCR, etc.  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
L
R
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
to LINE 2 IN  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
z Hint  
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to only the L(MONO) and VIDEO  
input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack.  
b Notes  
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.  
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other  
equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).  
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting an External Decoder  
You can watch or record external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder)  
programmes if you connect a decoder (not supplied) to the recorder. Disconnect the recorder’s  
mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder. Note that when you set “LINE 1 In”  
programme positions” (page 34), you will not be able to select “L1” because Line 1 will  
become a dedicated line for the decoder.  
Connecting a decoder  
External decoder (PAY-TV/  
Canal Plus analogue decoder)  
TV  
to AERIAL IN  
Aerial cable  
(supplied)  
to SCART input  
SCART cord  
(not supplied)  
SCART cord  
(not supplied)  
to T LINE 3 – TV  
to AERIAL OUT  
to i LINE 1/DECODER  
DVD recorder  
,continued  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press  
ENTER.  
Setting external decoder (PAY-  
TV/Canal Plus analogue  
decoder) programme positions  
To watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue programmes, set your recorder to  
receive the programme positions using the  
on-screen display.  
In order to set the programme positions  
correctly, be sure to follow all of the steps  
below.  
4 Select “LINE 3 Out,” and press  
ENTER.  
Number  
buttons  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
5 Press M/m to select “Video” or  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
“RGB,” and press ENTER.  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
O
6 Select “LINE 1 In,” and press ENTER.  
.
>
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
7 Press M/m to select “Decoder,” and  
press ENTER.  
8 Press O RETURN to return the cursor  
to the left column.  
9 Select “Analog Tuner,” and press  
ENTER.  
10 Select “Manual CH Setting,” and  
press ENTER.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
b Notes  
11 Select “Next Screen,” and press  
ENTER.  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you  
will not be able to view the signals from the  
connected decoder.  
12 Select your country/region, and press  
• To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-  
TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes  
during recording, press the PROGRAM + button  
on the recorder (“SCART THRU” appears on the  
front panel display). To return to the previous  
display, press the PROGRAM – button on the  
recorder (“SCART NORM” appears on the front  
panel display). The recorder automatically  
switches to the programme tuned by the  
recorder’s tuner after the recording has finished.  
To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-  
TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes  
while the recorder is in standby mode, set “Power  
Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic” setup  
ENTER.  
Programme position  
13 Select the desired programme  
position using ./> or number  
buttons.  
14 Select “Channel” using M/m.  
15 Select the external decoder  
programme position using </,.  
16 Select “Sound System” using M/m.  
17 Press </, to select an available TV  
system, B/G, D/K, I, or L.  
To receive broadcasts in France, select  
“L.”  
18 Select “Decoder” using M/m.  
19 Select “On” using </,, and press  
ENTER.  
To return to the previous step  
Press O RETURN.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eight Basic Operations  
2. Recording a  
Programme  
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder  
1. Inserting a Disc  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
+
RW  
+
RVR  
RVideo  
-
-
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
DVD VCD CD  
DATA DVD  
This section introduces the basic operation to  
record a current TV programme to the hard  
disk (HDD) or to a disc (DVD). For an  
explanation of how to make timer recordings,  
see page 52 (Digital Mode) or page 71  
(Analogue Mode).  
DATA CD  
Z (open/  
close)  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
PROG +/–  
INPUT  
TV/DVD  
1 Press DVD.  
2 Press Z (open/close), and place a  
disc on the disc tray.  
DISPLAY  
TV PAUSE  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
REC MODE  
Recording/playing side facing down  
TV t  
3 Press Z (open/close) to close the disc  
tray.  
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the  
front panel display.  
Unused DVDs are formatted  
automatically.  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you want to record to a DVD, insert a  
recordable DVD.  
• For DVD-RW discs  
2 Press PROG +/– to select the  
programme position or input source  
you want to record.  
DVD-RWs are formatted in the  
recording format (VR mode or Video  
mode) set by “Format DVD-RW” of  
“Basic” in the “Disc Setup” setup  
• For DVD-R discs  
DVD-Rs are automatically formatted in  
Video mode. To format an unused  
DVD-R in VR mode, format the disc in  
the “Format” setup (page 47) before  
you make a recording.  
If the disc is recordable on this recorder,  
you can manually re-format the disc to  
make a blank disc (page 47).  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
the recording mode.  
• To turn off the TV Direct Rec. function, set  
“SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through” in the  
“Options” setup (page 150).  
Each time you press the button, the  
display on the TV screen changes as  
follows:  
• Some buttons, such as the TITLE LIST button or  
H button, do not work when “TV” appears in  
the front panel display.  
• If you press the [/1 button while recording, the  
recorder stops recording and turns off.  
• After pressing the z REC button, it may take a  
short while to start recording.  
• You cannot change the recording mode while  
recording.  
* Available when “Manual Rec. Mode” is set  
to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording”  
For more details about the recording  
mode, see page 71.  
• If there is a power failure, the programme you are  
recording may be erased.  
• You cannot watch a PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
programme while recording another PAY-TV/  
Canal Plus programme.  
• To use the TV Direct Rec. function, you must first  
correctly set the recorder’s clock.  
4 Press z REC.  
Recording starts.  
When recording to the HDD, recording  
stops after 12 hours of continuous  
recording or when the HDD is full.  
When recording to a DVD, recording  
stops when the DVD is full.  
Checking the disc status while  
recording  
To stop recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for  
recorder to stop recording.  
You can check the recording information  
such as recording time or disc type.  
Press DISPLAY during recording.  
The recording information appears.  
To watch another TV programme while  
recording  
If your TV is connected to the T LINE 3 –  
TV jack, set your TV to the TV input using  
the TV/DVD button and select the  
programme you want to watch. If your TV is  
connected to the LINE 2 OUT or  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the  
TV to TV input using the TV t button  
TV Direct Rec. (for SMARTLINK  
connections only)  
A Recording mode  
B Recording time  
C Disc type/format  
D Recording status  
When the TV is turned on and the recorder is  
turned off, press TV PAUSE. The recorder  
automatically turns on and starts recording  
what you are watching on the TV to the HDD.  
Set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 150).  
Press DISPLAY to turn off the display.  
z Hint  
If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL  
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks, you  
can switch between digital mode and analogue  
mode using the INPUT button.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4-Title List (Example: HDD)  
3. Playing the Recorded  
Programme (Title List)  
+
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
RW  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
To play a recorded title, select the title from  
the Title List.  
HDD  
DVD  
m
8-Title List  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
O
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
.
>
H
X
x
A Disc type:  
Displays the media type, HDD or DVD.  
PLAY  
MODE  
B Total number of titles  
C Sub-menu:  
Press , to display the sub-menu.  
The sub-menu displays options  
applicable only to the selected item. The  
displayed options differ depending upon  
the model, situation, and disc type.  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a DVD (see “1.  
Playback starts automatically depending  
on the disc.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
To show the 8-Title List, press < to  
select “Title View,” and press ENTER,  
then select “8 Titles” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Sub-menu  
D Scroll bar:  
Appears when all of the titles do not fit  
on the list. To view the hidden titles,  
press M/m.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Select “Original” or “Play List” using M/  
E Title information:  
m, and press ENTER.  
Displays the title number, title thumbnail  
picture (playback picture for the selected  
title, still images for the other titles),  
recording date, recorded station name (or  
programme position number), recording  
mode, title name, and title size.  
To change the title order for HDD (Sort  
Titles)  
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
displayed.  
Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
“Recording”: Indicates that the title is  
currently being recorded.  
: Indicates protected title.  
“NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly  
recorded (not played back) (HDD only).  
: Press DISPLAY to display  
Select the item using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Order  
Sorted  
.” “  
” indicates titles  
By Date  
In order of when the titles  
were recorded. The title  
that is recorded most  
recently is listed at the  
top.  
containing “Copy-Once” copy protection  
signals (HDD only) (page 99).  
: Indicates that the title is recorded  
using the Update function.  
Genre icons: Indicates the title’s genre  
(HDD only).  
Unseen Title  
In order of when the titles  
were recorded. The title  
that is recorded most  
recently and has not been  
played is listed at the top.  
Playlist titles are not  
displayed.  
F Remaining time of the current disc in  
the current recording mode (example:  
SP mode)  
G Detailed information for the selected  
By Title  
In alphabetical order.  
title  
By Number  
In order of recorded title  
number.  
The resume point time is shown in the 8-  
Title List.  
3 Select a title using M/m, and press  
To search for a title by genre (HDD only)  
ENTER.  
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
displayed.  
Select “Genre” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
To stop playback  
Press x (stop).  
Select a genre using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
Press ./> while the Title List is  
displayed. Each time you press ./>,  
the entire Title List changes to the next/  
previous page of titles.  
To change a title thumbnail picture  
(Thumbnail)  
After recording, the first scene of the  
recording (the title) is automatically set as the  
thumbnail picture.  
You can select a favourite scene for the  
thumbnail picture shown in the Title List.  
About the Title List for DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
(VR mode)  
You can switch the Title List to show  
Original or Playlist titles.  
1
Press TITLE LIST.  
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode),  
switch the Title Lists, if necessary.  
1
Press < while the Title List is  
displayed.  
2
Select a title, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
2
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
,continued  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
4
Select “Edit” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
4. Displaying the Playing  
Time and Play  
Information  
Select “Set Thumbnail” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The display for setting the thumbnail  
point appears and the title starts to play.  
5
6
While watching the playback picture,  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
press H, X or c  
m/M  
C
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
CD  
to select the scene you want to set for a  
thumbnail picture, and press X.  
Playback pauses.  
You can also select a scene using the  
PLAY MODE button (page 89).  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
You can check the playing time of the current  
title, chapter, track, or disc. Also, you can  
check the disc name recorded on the DVD/  
CD.  
Select “OK” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail  
picture.  
To return to the Title List, press  
O RETURN.  
To change the thumbnail preview mode  
(Set Preview) (HDD only)  
You can select “Quick Preview” or “Normal”  
for the thumbnail preview mode in the Title  
List. Set “Set Preview” in the “Options” setup  
DISPLAY  
To turn off the Title List  
Press TITLE LIST.  
z Hint  
You can select “Title List” from the System Menu.  
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.  
The displays differ depending on the disc  
type or playing status.  
b Notes  
• The title names may not appear for DVDs created  
on other DVD recorders.  
In stop mode  
Example: DVD-RW in VR mode  
• It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail  
pictures to be displayed.  
• After editing, the title thumbnail picture may  
change to the first scene of the recording (title).  
• After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on  
the source recording is cancelled.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
z Hints  
During playback  
Example: DVD-R in Video mode  
• When “On Screen Display” is set to “On”  
(default) in the “Options” setup (page 149),  
information automatically appears on the screen  
when the recorder is operated.  
• To increase disc space, see “To open up disc  
b Note  
Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be  
displayed correctly.  
A Playing status  
B Shows that the Resume Play is  
C Current selected recording mode  
(remaining DVD recording time/disc  
D Remaining time  
E Station name and programme position  
number  
F Audio setting for the current  
programme  
G Recording restrictions for the current  
programme  
H TV mode or DVD mode (page 25)  
I Disc information  
J Title type (Original or Playlist) for  
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode  
K Disc type/format (page 10)  
Displays the finalised disc in Video  
mode as “DVD-Video.”  
L Title number-Chapter number  
M Playing time  
N Multi-angles indicator (page 80)  
O Copy-protected indicator (page 99)  
P Data transfer bar and rate  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Select “Title Name,” and press  
ENTER.  
5. Changing the Name of  
a Recorded Programme  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
The current name is displayed at the  
input row.  
+
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
RW  
Input row  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can label a DVD, title, or programme by  
entering characters. You can enter up to 64  
characters for a title recorded in the HDD/  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), 40 characters  
for a title recorded in the DVD+RW/DVD-  
RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video  
mode), but the actual number of characters  
displayed in the menus such as the Title List  
will vary. The steps below explain how to  
change the name of the recorded programme.  
5 Move the cursor to the point where you  
want to insert the character using  
m/M.  
To erase all of the characters, press and  
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.  
Number  
buttons  
6 Select “Upper case” or “Lower case”  
CLEAR  
using ./>.  
The characters for the selected type are  
displayed.  
The type of characters will change  
according to the language you select in  
“Easy Setup.”  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
O
7 Press </M/m/, to select the  
character you want to enter, and press  
ENTER.  
.
m
>
M
x
X
The selected character appears at the  
input row.  
To insert a space, press X (or select  
“Space,” and press ENTER).  
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
remaining characters.  
To erase a character, move the cursor to  
the character at the input row, and press  
CLEAR (or select “Clear,” and press  
ENTER).  
To insert a character, move the cursor to  
the right of the point where you want to  
insert the character. Then select the  
character, and press ENTER.  
2 Select a title, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
To erase all of the characters, press and  
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9 Press x (or select “OK,” and press  
ENTER).  
6. Labelling and  
Protecting a Disc  
To cancel the setting, press  
O RETURN.  
You can execute options effective for the  
entire disc in the “Disc Setup” setup.  
To use the number buttons  
You can also use the number buttons to enter  
characters. Refer to the number next to each  
row of letters on your TV screen.  
1
In step 7 above, press a number button  
repeatedly to select a character.  
Example:  
Press the number 3 button once to enter  
“D.”  
Press the number 3 button three times to  
enter “F.”  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
2
3
Press ENTER and select the next  
character.  
Press x (or select “OK,” and press  
ENTER).  
Labelling a disc  
+
RW  
-
-
+
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
,continued  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
5 Select “Input Disc Name,” and press  
ENTER.  
5 Select “Protect Disc,” and press  
ENTER.  
6 Select “Next Screen,” and press  
ENTER.  
Enter the disc name (page 42).  
b Note  
You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (VR mode) disc name, and 40 characters  
for a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/  
DVD-R (Video mode) disc name. The disc name  
may not appear when the disc is played on other  
DVD equipment.  
6 Select “On,” and press ENTER.  
7 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
To cancel the protection  
Select “Off” in step 6.  
Protecting a disc  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
z Hint  
You can set protection for individual titles  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Finalising is necessary when  
playing on any equipment other  
than this recorder.  
After finalising, you cannot edit or  
record on the disc.  
+
R
7. Playing the Disc on  
Other DVD Equipment  
(Finalise)  
-
RVideo  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
RVideo  
Finalising is necessary when you play discs  
recorded with this recorder on other DVD  
equipment.  
When you finalise a DVD+RW, DVD-RW  
(Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video  
mode), a DVD menu will be automatically  
created, which can be displayed on other  
DVD equipment.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
Before finalising, check the differences  
between the disc types in the table below.  
DISPLAY  
Differences between disc types  
Discs are automatically finalised  
+
RW  
when removed from the recorder.  
However, you may need to finalise  
the disc for certain DVD  
1 Insert a disc.  
equipment, or if the recording time  
is short. You can edit or record on  
the disc even after finalising.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
Finalising is unnecessary when  
playing a disc on VR format  
compatible equipment.  
-
RWVR  
Even if your other DVD equipment  
is VR format compatible, you may  
need to finalise the disc, especially  
if the recording time is short. You  
can edit or record on the disc even  
after finalising.  
Finalising is necessary when  
playing on any equipment other  
than this recorder.  
After finalising, you cannot edit or  
record on the disc. If you want to  
record on it again, unfinalise  
(page 46) or reformat the disc  
(page 47). However, if you  
reformat the disc, all recorded  
contents will be erased.  
-
RWVideo  
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.  
Finalising is necessary. The disc  
can be played only on equipment  
that supports DVD-R in VR mode.  
After finalising you cannot edit or  
record on the disc using this  
recorder.  
-
RVR  
5 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.  
,continued  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
b Note  
6 Select “Next Screen,” and press  
ENTER.  
The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs  
(Video mode) that have been finalised on another  
recorder.  
For DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), the  
recorder starts finalising the disc. Go to  
step 9.  
1 Insert a disc.  
7 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)  
Select a title menu style, and press  
ENTER.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
The menu appears in the selected title  
menu style when the “top menu” (or  
“menu” for a DVD+RW/DVD+R) is  
selected on the DVD equipment.  
8 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)  
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts finalising the disc.  
9 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.  
z Hint  
You can check whether the disc has been finalised  
or not. Press DISPLAY after step 1 (page 40).  
b Notes  
• Depending on the condition of the disc,  
recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not  
play even if the discs are finalised.  
• The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc  
if it was recorded on another recorder.  
• Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD  
equipment may damage the recorded contents.  
• When using a DVD+RW, you can edit or record  
on the disc even after finalising. However, the  
title menu will not be displayed. Finalise the disc  
again to display the title menu.  
5 Select “Unfinalise,” and press  
ENTER.  
Unfinalising a disc  
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
For DVD-RWs (Video mode)  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts unfinalising the disc.  
Unfinalising may take several minutes.  
DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been  
finalised to prohibit additional recording or  
editing can be unfinalised to allow further  
recording or editing.  
For DVD-RWs (VR mode)  
If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW  
(VR mode) that has been finalised with other  
DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Select “Format,” and press ENTER.  
8. Reformatting a Disc  
+
RW  
-
-
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
New discs are automatically formatted when  
inserted. If necessary, you can manually re-  
format a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R  
disc to make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs or  
DVD-Rs, you can select a recording format  
(VR mode or Video mode) according to your  
needs.  
5 Select an item, and press ENTER.  
“VR Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/DVD-  
Rs (VR mode or unrecorded discs) in VR  
mode.  
Video Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
“Format DVD+RW”: Formats  
DVD+RWs.  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
All contents on the disc are erased.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
z Hint  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
By reformatting, you can change the recording  
format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-  
RWs that have been finalised.  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1 Press GUIDE.  
This display consists of an information  
box and an 8-channel programme list  
covering a 30-minute period.  
Guide to Digital Services  
(For Freeview users only)  
EPG (Electronic  
Programme Guide)  
Example of EPG Display:  
The Electronic Programme Guide is a guide  
showing the television programme schedule  
for a day or more at a time on your television  
(via the Digital Terrestrial Television tuner  
included in this recorder).  
The EPG provides a quick and easy way to:  
• View a complete list of all available  
channels.  
• View a channel list related to a chosen date  
or genre.  
A Indicates the currently selected  
channel number and station name  
with the programme title and  
genre.  
• Set a programme to be recorded (page 55).  
B Indicates the currently selected  
programme and allows you to  
move around the list.  
b Note  
Digital Services availability and content depend on  
the broadcaster.  
Digital Services are not instantly available when the  
recorder is first turned on.  
C Channel name  
D Indicates if a timer recording is  
associated with the programme  
Viewing a list of available  
channels  
E Colour buttons  
F Indicates that short programmes  
that are not displayed on the list are  
scheduled.  
G Truncated programme title in case  
the name is too long to be  
displayed in the cell.  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
H Time slot  
I Indicates the current time and date.  
INFO  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
,, and press ENTER.  
O
You can also select a programme using  
the red button.  
PAGE –  
PAGE +  
If you press , after selecting the last  
programme on the right, the schedule for  
the next 30 minutes is displayed  
(depending on availability from the  
broadcaster).  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
z Hint  
You can display the channel list by pressing the  
ENTER button while watching a programme. To  
watch another channel, select a channel using </  
M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
Programme Information  
The programme information display provides  
a quick and easy way to:  
• View descriptions of the programmes being  
broadcast now and next on the current  
channel.  
• View descriptions of the programmes being  
broadcast now and next on the other  
channels.  
Available buttons in the programme list  
Buttons  
Operations  
PAGE +/–  
Display the previous/next  
eight channels.  
INFO  
Display the detailed  
information of the  
programme (page 49).  
O
RETURN  
Close the display.  
To search for programmes by date  
1
Press the green button while the  
programme list is displayed.  
2
3
4
Select a date in the “Date” row.  
Select a time in the “Time” row.  
INFO  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
Select “Jump,” and press ENTER.  
The programme list for the specified date  
and time is displayed.  
To search programmes by genre  
1
Press the yellow button while the  
programme list is displayed.  
Displaying the programme  
information  
2
3
4
Select a date in the “Date” row.  
Select a time in the “Time” row.  
Select the “Genre” row, and press  
ENTER.  
The genre list is displayed.  
1 Select a channel.  
2 Press INFO.  
The Information display appears  
showing a description of the current  
programme on view.  
5
Select a genre using </M/m/,, and  
press ENTER.  
6
7
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
Select “Search,” and press ENTER.  
The programme list for the specified  
genre is displayed.  
,continued  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Available buttons in the Information  
display  
Viewing a Digital Text  
Service  
Buttons  
Operations  
M/m  
Toggle the display between  
description of the current/  
next programme  
Many digital TV channels broadcast  
information via their text service. This digital  
service includes high-quality digital text and  
graphics along with advanced navigation  
options. Additionally, this recorder has  
access to dedicated text channels transmitted  
by the broadcasters.  
</,  
Display programme  
information for other  
channels  
ENTER  
INFO  
View the selected channel  
Display the detailed  
programme information  
b Note  
The appearance, content and navigation methods of  
all digital text services are decided by the  
broadcaster.  
PROG +/–  
Number  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
O
Selecting digital text from  
dedicated digital teletext  
channels  
1 Select a dedicated channel that is  
broadcasting digital text.  
You can search for a dedicated digital  
text channel using the “Electronic  
Programme Guide” (page 48).  
The text page is displayed.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 Once the text page is displayed (this  
may take some time), follow the on-  
screen instructions to obtain your  
required selection.  
On some pages the TV programme may  
also be displayed on the text screen. On-  
screen instructions will inform you how  
to change the displayed programme.  
If you are instructed to press “OK” or  
“Select” when viewing the text pages,  
press ENTER.  
To exit the text service  
Follow the on-screen instructions, or press  
PROG +/–.  
Selecting digital text from  
other channels  
Digital text services may also be available on  
other digital channels. This is sometimes  
indicated by a small symbol on your TV  
screen, superimposed on the programme you  
are watching.  
1 Select a channel.  
2 Press  
(text) or the button indicated  
on screen by the broadcaster.  
The text information appears.  
3 Access required information using  
</M/m/,, the colour buttons and/  
or the number buttons.  
If you are instructed to press “OK” or  
“Select” when viewing the text pages,  
press ENTER.  
To exit the text service  
Follow the on-screen instructions, or press  
(text) or EXIT/O RETURN.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Approx. recording time  
(hours)  
Timer Recording  
(For Freeview users only)  
*1  
Recording  
mode  
HDD  
DVD  
RDR- RDR- RDR- RDR-  
HXD HXD HXD HXD  
770 870 970 1070  
Before Recording  
Before you start recording…  
• Check that the disc has enough available  
space for the recording (page 40). For the  
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you  
can free up disc space by erasing titles  
HQ (High 25  
quality)  
34  
50  
68  
53  
105 1 hr.  
1 min.  
HSP  
R 37  
79  
155 1 hr.  
30 min.  
SP  
51  
105 210  
2
(Standard  
mode)  
• Adjust the recording picture quality if  
necessary (page 59).  
LSP  
r 63  
84  
130 265 2 hr.  
30 min.  
b Notes  
• To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment,  
finalise the disc (page 45).  
ESP  
LP  
r 75  
100 155 315  
3
• If digital teletext is operated while recording, its  
contents will be recorded on the disc.  
• If the subtitles are displayed while recording, they  
will be recorded on the disc.  
r 100 135 210 420  
r 150 200 315 635  
r 200 270 425 850  
4
6
8
EP  
SLP  
*2  
SEP  
255 340 530 1060 10  
Recording mode  
(Long  
duration)  
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of  
video tapes, you can select the desired  
recording mode using the REC MODE  
button.  
Recording modes with higher quality provide  
a more beautiful recording, but the large data  
volume also results in a shorter recording  
time.  
*1  
The approximate recording time is for 12 cm  
DVD discs.  
The approximate recording times for DVD+R  
DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)  
discs are as follows:  
HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes  
HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes  
SP: 3 hours 35 minutes  
Conversely, a longer duration provides a  
longer recording time, but the lower data  
volume results in a coarser picture quality.  
LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes  
ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes  
LP: 7 hours 11 minutes  
EP: 10 hours 46 minutes  
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the  
recording modes.  
SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes  
SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes  
When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP  
is the longest recording time available. If you  
select SEP, the recording mode will  
automatically revert to SLP.  
*2  
To select further options for recording mode  
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec.  
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 141). To record  
pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on  
the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On  
(go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For  
details about manual recording mode, see  
z Hint  
To easily select a manual recording mode, press  
REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and  
select a manual recording mode using </,.  
For timer recording, you can also select  
“AUTO” as recording mode, which  
maximizes the recording quality for the space  
available on the disc (if recording to DVD),  
or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to  
HDD).  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
b Notes  
• The maximum continuous recording time to the  
HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer  
than 12 hours is divided.  
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies  
with the recording time.  
– Recording a programme with poor reception, or  
a programme or video source of low picture  
quality.  
Timer Recording  
(Standard/EPG)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
– Recording on a disc that has already been  
edited.  
– Recording only a still picture or just sound.  
• Programmes are recorded in the following aspect  
ratio.  
– In the original aspect ratio, when recording to  
the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is  
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode).  
– In 4:3 when recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.  
• When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode),  
the title is divided when the layer switches.  
You can set the timer for a total of 32  
programmes, up to 30 days in advance.  
There are three methods to set the timer: the  
standard method, EPG method and Series  
Recording method.  
• Standard: Set the date, time, and  
programme position of the programme  
manually.  
• EPG: Set a programme to be recorded based  
on the information provided by the EPG  
(Electronic Programme Guide) (page 55).  
• Series Recording: Automatically sets the  
recorder to record programmes in a series  
Unrecordable pictures  
Pictures with copy protection cannot be  
recorded on this recorder.  
Setting the timer manually  
(Standard)  
Copy control Recordable discs  
signals  
Copy-Free  
+
-
RWVR  
RW  
HDD  
-
+
R
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
-
RVideo  
Copy-Once  
HDD  
-
RWVR  
(CPRM*)  
(CPRM*)  
-
RVR  
TIMER  
Copy-Never  
None  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM  
compatible equipment (page 10).  
x REC  
STOP  
,continued  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
“Record to”: Sets the recording  
destination. If there is not enough  
available DVD disc space for the  
recording, the recorder automatically  
records the programme to the HDD  
even if you select “DVD” (Recovery  
Recording).  
1 Press TIMER.  
The “Timer List” display appears.  
“Recording Mode”: Sets the recording  
mode (page 52).  
“VPS/PDC”: Sets the VPS/PDC  
only)” below.  
2 Select the “New Input” row, and press  
ENTER.  
“Update”: Sets the recorder  
automatically replacing the previous  
timer recording with the new one.  
“EPG Link” (page 58)  
“Series Recording” (page 57)  
• To enter a title name, select “Set Title  
Name” and press ENTER (page 42).  
• If you make a mistake, select the item  
and change the setting.  
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The “Timer List” display (page 60)  
appears.  
3 Select an item using </, and  
adjust using M/m. Then press ENTER.  
The adjustable items are listed below.  
“Pr/CH”: Sets the programme position  
and the source.  
The timer recording indicator lights up  
on the front panel display and the  
recorder is ready to start recording.  
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off  
the recorder before the timer recording  
starts.  
“Date”: Sets the date (up to 30 days  
later). Select a recording pattern by  
pressing M repeatedly to set the timer for  
the same daily or weekly programmes.  
“Start”: Sets the start time.  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
“Stop”: Sets the stop time.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
“Extend”: Sets duration when a timer  
recording is in progress. If the  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
programme set to be recorded daily or  
weekly is extended, the manually  
extended time set here will be added to  
the subsequent timer recording times.  
Note that when “VPS/PDC” is set to  
“On,” you cannot make the “Extend”  
setting.  
• If you want to make the detailed  
settings, select “Set Details” and press  
ENTER. Select an item using M/m and  
set using </,.  
About the VPS/PDC function (For analogue  
broadcasting only)  
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV  
programmes in some broadcast systems.  
These signals ensure that timer recordings are  
made regardless of any broadcast delays,  
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.  
To use the VPS/PDC function  
Set “VPS/PDC” to “On” in step 3 above.  
When you turn on this function, the recorder  
starts scanning the channels before the timer  
recording starts.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Rec. Mode Adjust  
Recording TV programmes  
using the EPG  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”  
The EPG function is a feature that simplifies  
setting the timer. Just select the programme  
you want to record in the EPG display. The  
date, time, and channel of that programme are  
set automatically.  
If the timer settings overlap  
The confirmation screen appears.  
To store the setting, select “Yes.”  
To cancel the overlapped setting, select “No.”  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
Red button  
GUIDE  
z Hints  
• You can also display the Timer display by  
selecting “Timer Recording” from the System  
Menu.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
• You can play the title as it is being recorded by  
selecting the programme title on the Title List  
PAGE –  
PAGE +  
b Notes  
x REC  
STOP  
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full  
appears on the screen, change the recording  
destination to “DVD,” or make available space  
for the recording (page 92).  
• Check that the clock is correctly set before setting  
the timer recording. If not, the timer recording  
cannot be made.  
1 Press GUIDE.  
• To record a satellite programme, turn on the  
satellite tuner and select the satellite programme  
you want to record. Leave the satellite tuner  
turned on until the recorder finishes recording.  
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or  
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be  
made if it overlaps with a programme that has  
priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the  
overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the  
priority order of the settings (page 60).  
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be  
made while recording a programme that has  
priority.  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,.  
• The beginning of some recordings may not be  
made when using the VPS/PDC function.  
• You cannot extend the recording duration time  
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”  
To know more about the navigation  
options in the EPG application, see  
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works  
with a timer recording and the VPS/PDC function  
set to off. It does not function with Quick Timer.  
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”  
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”  
,continued  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Press the red button.  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, recording mode,  
etc., settings appear.  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
If the timer settings overlap  
To extend the recording duration time  
while recording (only when “EPG Link” is  
set to “Off”)  
• If you want to change the setting, press  
</, to select the item and press M/m  
to change the setting (page 54).  
“EPG Link” (page 58)  
To confirm, change, or cancel timer  
recording (only when “EPG Link” is set to  
“Off”)  
“Series Recording” (page 57)  
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
• In case of a current TV/radio/data  
broadcast timer setting, your recorder  
will immediately start recording.  
z Hint  
The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function also works with  
this timer method (page 55).  
b Note  
The EPG programme start and end time are  
determined by the broadcaster.  
Your recorder will automatically begin  
recording when the programme starts.  
To modify the timer setting, see page 60.  
Some examples of timer event icon  
types are:  
(red): Indicates that the whole  
programme is set to be recorded.  
(grey): Indicates that the programme  
is set to be recorded using Series  
Recording (page 57).  
To scroll the EPG display by page (Page  
mode)  
Press PAGE +/– while the EPG display is  
turned on to display the previous/next eight  
channels.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Series Recording  
Recording programmes using  
Series Recording  
Automatically record programmes in a series.  
1
Press GUIDE.  
Series Recording is a feature which uses  
information from the Electronic Programme  
Guide.  
b Notes  
• This function cannot be used when the  
broadcaster does not include series information  
with the programme data.  
• Whether or not a programme is in a series is  
determined by the broadcaster.  
2
3
Select a programme using </M/m/,.  
Press the red button.  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, recording mode,  
etc., settings appear.  
Red button  
GUIDE  
TIMER  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
O
RETURN  
z REC  
4
5
Select “Set Details,” and press ENTER.  
x REC  
STOP  
Set “Series Recording” to “On,” and  
press O RETURN.  
6
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The selected programme is set for  
recording and appears in the Timer List  
(page 60). The other programmes in the  
series will be set for recording (appear in  
the Timer List) as each previous  
recording is completed.  
For example, if there are three  
programmes in a series, the second  
programme will be set for recording only  
after the first recording is finished. The  
third programme will be set for recording  
only after the second recording is  
finished.  
You can search for link programmes  
using “Series Search” (page 58).  
,continued  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
EPG Link  
Using the Quick Timer function  
Automatically update the date, start and stop  
times settings when changing the Electronic  
Programme Guide.  
You can set the recorder to record in 30-  
minute increments.  
Set “EPG Link” to “On” in step 5 of “Series  
Press z REC repeatedly to set the  
duration.  
Each press advances the time in 30-minute  
increments. The maximum duration is six  
hours.  
Recording Split Programmes  
Movies and other programmes that are split  
into 2 or more parts are called Split  
Programmes. If you set the timer for one part  
of a Split Programme, the other parts are  
automatically recorded. For example, if the  
first half is set to be recorded, the last half  
will be recorded automatically.  
(normal recording)  
The time counter decreases minute by minute  
to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the  
power turns off).  
To search for link programmes  
1
2
3
Press TIMER.  
To cancel the Quick Timer  
Select the timer setting, and press ,.  
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter  
appears in the front panel display. The  
recorder returns to normal recording mode.  
To stop recording, press x REC STOP.  
When the following options appear in the  
sub-menu, select an option, and press  
ENTER.  
“Alternate Search”: Searches for repeat  
programmes. The repeat programmes are  
displayed in the EPG.  
b Note  
If you turn off the recorder during recording,  
recording is stopped.  
“Series Search”: Searches for  
programmes in a series. The programmes  
in the series are displayed in the EPG.  
“Recommendation Search”: Searches for  
programmes recommended by  
broadcaster as a link for current series.  
The recommended programmes are  
displayed in the EPG.  
To set the programme for recording,  
follow the instructions for “Recording  
(page 55) from step 2.  
b Notes  
• Only the earliest part of the Split Programme is  
displayed on the Timer List.  
• Any next Split Programme part that starts 3 or  
more hours later cannot be recorded  
automatically.  
• This recorder is featured with an EPG timer auto  
extend functionality that allows EPG timer  
recordings to be made in case of an early start  
(before the scheduled start time) or late finish  
(after the scheduled end time).  
• When “EPG Link” is set to “On,” you cannot  
change the date, start and stop time settings.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To create your own setting  
Adjusting the recording picture  
quality  
1
Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or  
“Memory3” in step 3.  
2
Select “Detailed Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display for adjusting detailed  
settings appears.  
You can adjust the picture quality of digitally  
broadcasts programmes by selecting a preset  
setting. You can also adjust the picture  
quality by changing detailed settings, and  
store up to three settings in the memory.  
3
Select an item using M/m, and adjust  
settings using </,.  
For details about each setting, see the  
explanation of the display.  
b Note  
Only progressive video signals for recording can be  
adjusted.  
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive  
video signal when “Component Video  
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).  
Select “Motion” for a picture, including  
subjects that move dynamically.  
Select “Still” for a picture with little  
movement.  
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive  
video signal to match the type of DVD  
software that you are watching when  
“Component Video Out” is set to  
“Progressive” (page 136).  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
Select “Auto” to detect the software type  
(Film-based or Video-based)  
DISPLAY  
automatically and select the appropriate  
conversion mode. Normally select this  
position.  
Select “Off” to fix the conversion mode  
to the mode for Video-based software.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.  
The System Menu appears.  
4
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
The setting is automatically stored as the  
setting you selected in step 1.  
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and  
press ENTER.  
3 Select a preset setting, and press  
ENTER.  
Creating chapters in a title  
“Tuner”: TV broadcasts  
“VCR”: Video cassettes  
The recorder can automatically divide a  
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting  
chapter marks. To select chapter mark  
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto  
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter  
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)”  
in the “Recording” setup (page 143).  
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR  
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can  
edit chapter marks (page 95).  
“DTV”: Digital broadcasts  
“Memory1”/“Memory2”/“Memory3”:  
Your own settings. To create your own  
To check the detailed settings for the  
selected preset, press DISPLAY.  
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 Select the timer setting you want to  
check/change/cancel, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Checking/Changing/  
Cancelling Timer  
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
“Modify”:  
Settings (Timer List)  
Changes the timer setting.  
Select an item using </, and adjust  
using M/m. Select “OK” and press  
ENTER.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
You can check, change, or cancel the timer  
settings using the Timer List.  
b Note  
You cannot change the timer settings with “EPG  
Link” set to “On.”  
“Erase”:  
Erases the timer setting.  
Select “Yes” and press ENTER.  
“Skip Once”:  
Cancels the daily or weekly recordings  
only once. After cancelling the timer  
setting, “Skip Once” appears next to the  
timer setting in the Timer List.  
“Alternate Search” (page 58)  
“Series Search” (page 58)  
TIMER  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
.
>
“Recommendation Search” (page 58)  
To change or cancel the setting, repeat  
steps 2 and 3 above.  
1 Press TIMER.  
The “Timer List” display appears.  
When the timer settings overlap  
• The programme that starts first has priority  
and the entire programme is recorded.  
• After finishing the previous recording, the  
other recording starts with several tens-of-  
second’s delay (when the end-time of one  
recording and the start-time of another are  
the same).  
• When the recordings start at the same time,  
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel  
the timer setting for the programme that you  
are not going to record.  
Timer information displays the recording  
date, time, recording mode, etc.  
When all of the timer settings do not fit  
on the list, the scroll bar appears.  
To view the hidden timer settings, press  
M/m.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
z Hints  
• For manual timer settings, you cannot modify the  
timer setting for the current recording, but you  
can extend the duration of the recording time  
while recording (page 56).  
For timer settings using the EPG, you can modify  
the timer setting for the current recording while  
recording, and extend the duration of the  
recording (only when “EPG Link” is set to  
“Off”).  
Recording from  
Connected Equipment  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can record from a connected VCR or  
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar  
Device” on page 31. Use the DV IN jack on  
the front panel if the equipment has a DV  
output jack (i.LINK jack).  
• You can move to the first row/bottom row of the  
Timer List using ./> while the list is  
displayed.  
b Notes  
• When “VPS/PDC” is set to “On” for one or more  
timer recordings, the start times may change in  
the event of a broadcast delay or early start.  
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be  
made while recording a programme that has  
priority.  
HDD  
DVD  
INPUT  
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or  
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be  
made if it overlaps with a programme that has  
priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the  
overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the  
priority order of the settings.  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
REC MODE  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a recordable  
2 Press INPUT to select an input source  
according to the connection you  
made.  
The front panel display changes as  
follows:  
programme position  
,continued  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Select the desired audio signal when  
recording a bilingual programme to  
the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video  
mode).  
Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and  
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R”  
in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
the recording mode.  
For details about the recording mode, see  
5 Insert the source tape into the  
connected equipment and set to  
playback pause.  
6 Press z REC.  
This recorder starts recording.  
7 Press the pause (or play) button on the  
connected equipment to cancel the  
playback pause status.  
The connected equipment starts playback  
and the playback image is recorded by  
this recorder.  
To stop recording, press x REC STOP  
on this recorder.  
If you connect a digital video camera with  
a DV IN jack  
for an explanation of how to record from the  
DV IN jack.  
z Hint  
You can adjust the settings for the recording picture  
b Notes  
• When recording a video game image, the screen  
may not be clear.  
• Any programme that contains a Copy-Never copy  
guard signal cannot be recorded.  
• When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or  
“B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound when  
playing in the following cases.  
– When recording in PCM mode.  
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD Recording  
Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD+RW/  
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
• You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is  
set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning the common elements  
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue  
broadcasting only)  
Press GUIDE.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”  
appears.  
Introduction to the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system is a free  
interactive programme guide. It displays up  
to seven days of programme listings,  
including programme titles, promotions, and  
broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data for  
the television programme listings are carried  
by your local broadcast host channel and are  
received through your aerial, set top box  
receiver, or direct cable connection from the  
wall.  
A Video Window: This shows the  
programme you were watching when  
you pressed GUIDE.  
Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list of  
all European host channels.  
These are just a few of the ways to use the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
– Search for programmes by listing them  
according to category (such as Movies or  
Sport) or by using the Keyword Search  
function (page 66).  
B Action Bar: When the same colour  
button on the remote is pressed, the  
Action Bar functions. The Action Bar  
function differs according to the  
screen.  
– Once you have found the programme you  
are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+  
system to set the timer for recording  
– You can set the system to display your  
favourite programmes according to  
conditions that you set, such as category  
and keyword (page 67).  
C Information Box: Shows information  
about the selected programme when  
the “Home Screen” is displayed.  
Contents will differ according to the  
displayed screen.  
D Menu Bar: Press the blue button  
(“Home”), and press M to move the  
cursor to the Menu Bar. Then select  
one of the following features using </  
,, and press ENTER.  
For more information, see “Watching TV  
“Grid”: Shows the programmes for the  
current time slot and next 7 days.  
“Search”: Allows you to search for  
titles by category or by keyword  
(page 66). The displayed category  
depends upon the programme data  
received by this recorder. Movies,  
Sport, and Children are examples of  
possible categories.  
“My TV”: Sets the profile for your  
favourite programmes (page 67).  
“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer  
settings (page 77).  
,continued  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
• Check the following if the programme  
guide data has not been received after  
waiting for a day:  
– “Easy Setup” (page 26) is completed.  
– The host channel is not disabled (see  
“Info”: Shows information when  
available.  
“Editor”: Allows you to edit the  
channel lineup and channel display  
“Setup”: Allows you to change the  
language, country/region, postal code,  
input source, or host channel.  
– The timer is not set.  
If the programme guide data still cannot be  
received after checking the above, search  
for the host channel at the following  
website and set the host channel manually  
E “Home” position: When you press the  
blue button (“Home”), the cursor  
returns to the last programme position  
on the “Grid.”  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
• If the host channel has changed or moved,  
the programme guide data cannot be  
received. In this case, follow the steps in  
channel” (page 68) to update the host  
channel setting.  
F Tiles: Shows the programme titles and  
category; green (sports), purple  
(movies), blue (children’s), teal  
(others).  
G Broadcast station Logo: Shows the  
broadcast station logo.  
• If the set top box receiver is connected to  
the recorder using a SCART cord only, do  
the following:  
– Turn on your set top box receiver.  
– Connect the set top box controller.  
– Follow the steps in “Changing the GUIDE  
to set the host channel manually. Be sure  
to set your set top box receiver (tuner) as  
the source.  
H Time Slot: Indicates the currently  
selected time slot. Use </, to select  
a different time slot.  
z Hint  
You can also move the cursor to the Menu Bar by  
pressing MENU.  
b Notes  
Troubleshooting guide  
• Your set top box receiver’s programme position  
may suddenly change even if the recorder is  
turned off. This is because the set top box  
controller has changed the programme position to  
receive the GUIDE Plus+ data.  
If you are having trouble displaying the  
television programme list, please check the  
following:  
• The clock must be set correctly. If the clock  
is not set, set it manually (page 129).  
• This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus+  
data several times a day when the recorder  
is turned off (standby mode). Turn off the  
recorder when you are not using it (for  
example, at night). After initial setup  
(page 26), it may take up to 24 hours for  
your recorder to start receiving programme  
listings. It may take up to one day to receive  
all seven days of TV programme listings.  
• When you reset the recorder (page 158) the  
following GUIDE Plus+ system settings are reset:  
– Country/region setting in “Easy Setup”  
– “Country” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the  
Menu Bar  
– “Postal Code” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the  
Menu Bar  
Note that the GUIDE Plus+ system is also reset  
when you make changes to the host channel  
settings.  
• The GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used when  
“Input Line System” is set to “NTSC” in the  
“Basic” setup (page 130).  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To select a programme position quickly  
using the TV broadcast station logo  
Watching TV Using the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
1
Press GUIDE.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home  
Screen” appears.  
2
Press the yellow button (“Channels”).  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
3
4
Select the TV broadcast station logo  
using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
The display returns to “Grid” and the  
programme currently being broadcast by  
the selected TV station is selected.  
PAGE –  
DAY –  
PAGE +  
DAY +  
1 Press GUIDE.  
Select a programme using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home  
Screen” appears.  
To return to the “Home” position  
Press the blue button (“Home”).  
The cursor returns to the home position on the  
“Grid.”  
To set a programme for timer recording  
To close the GUIDE Plus+ system  
Press GUIDE.  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,, and press ENTER.  
z Hints  
The GUIDE Plus+ system disappears and  
the programme position changes to the  
selected programme.  
• Press the PAGE +/– buttons to change the  
programme list by page.  
• Press the DAY +/– buttons to change the  
programme list by day.  
,continued  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To unlock the Video Window  
The Video Window is locked so that it does  
not change programme positions when you  
move the cursor across other titles.  
From “Grid,” select the logo of the  
programme position that is locked, and press  
the red button (“Unlock”). “ ” changes to  
Searching for a  
Programme Using the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
” and the Video Window is unlocked. To  
lock the Video Window, select the logo of the  
programme position you want to lock and  
press the red button (“Lock”).  
b Notes  
• The Video Window is locked during recording  
and the lock indicator appears in the Video  
Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window  
while recording.  
Colour  
buttons  
• If you are watching programmes through a set top  
box receiver, the Video Window may not change  
as fast as you move the cursor. In this case, lock  
the Video Window (page 66).  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
2 Select a category using </,.  
To search for a programme by keyword,  
select “My Choice.” You can search for  
all programmes that contain the keyword  
in the programme’s title and in the  
programme’s Information Box. If no  
keywords are displayed, enter the  
below.  
3 Select a sub-category using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Programmes that meet the conditions are  
listed.  
The sub-categories differ according to  
country/region.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Select a programme using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Listing Up Your Favourite  
Programme Information  
(My TV)  
To enter a new keyword  
1
Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
You can set a profile and list up only your  
favourite programme information.  
2
3
Select “My Choice” using </,.  
Press the yellow button (“Add”).  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
Colour  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
4
Select a character on the keyboard using  
</M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
To switch between upper-case, lower-  
case, or characters with accents, press the  
yellow button (“Keyboard”) repeatedly.  
To cancel entering a new keyword, press  
the red button (“Back”).  
Setting a profile  
1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and  
press the yellow button (“Profile”).  
5
6
Repeat step 4 to enter the keyword.  
Press the green button (“Save”).  
The entered keyword is registered.  
To delete the keyword, select the  
keyword you want to delete, and press  
the red button (“Delete”).  
To change the keyword, select the  
keyword you want to change, and press  
the green button (“Edit”).  
To set a programme for timer recording  
z Hint  
When two or more keywords are set for “My  
Choice,” you can select “All” for sub-category.  
,continued  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 Select “Channels,” “Categories,” or  
“Keywords,” and press the yellow  
button (“Add”).  
Making Changes to the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
“Channels”: Select the programme  
position using </M/m/,, and press  
ENTER. To add more programme  
positions, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 16  
programme positions.  
To cancel the registration, select a  
programme position, and press the red  
button (“Delete”).  
[/1  
Number  
buttons  
“Categories”: Select the category using  
</M/m/,, and press ENTER. To add  
more categories, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 4  
categories.  
To cancel the registration, select a  
category, and press the red button  
(“Delete”).  
Colour  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
“Keywords”: Enter a keyword. See “To  
more keywords, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 16  
keywords.  
To cancel the registration, select a  
keyword, and press the red button  
(“Delete”).  
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+  
host channel  
The default host channel setting is set to  
“Automatic,” so you should not have to  
change the host channel setting. However, if  
the host channel has changed or moved,  
update the host channel setting.  
3 Press ENTER.  
To change the profile settings  
Repeat from step 1 above.  
If the set top box receiver is connected to the  
recorder using a SCART cord only (page 17),  
Selecting and watching a  
programme from My TV  
1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and  
2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/  
press ENTER.  
m, and press ENTER.  
The programmes that match the profile  
conditions are displayed.  
3 Press the yellow button (“Reset”).  
4 Press [/1 to turn off the recorder.  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,, and press ENTER.  
To set a programme for timer recording  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 Wait for one day until the programme  
guide data can be received.  
9 Select “Confirm” using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
If the programme guide data has not been  
received after waiting for a day, search  
for the host channel at the following  
website and set the host channel  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+  
setup menu.  
10 Wait one day until the programme  
guide data can be received.  
To cancel the settings  
Press the red button (“Back”).  
Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host  
channel manually  
To return to the “Home” position  
Press the blue button (“Home”).  
The cursor returns to the home position on the  
“Grid.”  
If the set top box receiver is connected to the  
recorder using a SCART cord only and you  
want to receive the programme guide data  
from your set top box receiver, search for the  
host channel on the following website and set  
it for your area, following the steps below:  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
To check the GUIDE Plus+ system  
information  
1
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
2
Select “GUIDE Plus+ system  
Information” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/  
m, and press ENTER.  
Checking programme positions  
3 Press the yellow button (“Change”)  
Check whether programme position numbers  
are the same as the programme position  
numbers set in the “Analog Tuner” setup.  
If you want to make adjustments to the  
channel settings or change the channel name,  
twice.  
“Manual” appears.  
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar.  
4 Select “Source” using ,.  
5 Press the yellow button (“Source”)  
repeatedly to select the input source.  
6 Select “Prog. No.” using ,.  
7 Enter the programme position number  
2 Press ENTER.  
using the number buttons.  
3 Press , to move the cursor to the  
8 Press the green button (“Save”).  
right column.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
,continued  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 Select the programme position you  
want to check using M/m.  
To change the input source, press the red  
button (“Source”).  
To change the programme position, press  
the green button (“Prog. No.”), then enter  
a programme position number using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
b Note  
To receive from the recorder a programme position  
that can be received by either the set top box  
receiver or the recorder, change the input source in  
step 4.  
Disabling programme positions  
If any programme positions are unused or  
contain unwanted channels, you can hide  
them.  
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
2 In the left column, select the  
programme position you want to hide  
or display using M/m.  
3 Press the red button (“On/Off”).  
The disabled positions will turn grey.  
To show the disabled positions, press the  
red button (“On/Off”) again.  
b Notes  
• You cannot record a programme position if it is  
Tuner)” (page 133) even if it is set to “On” in the  
“Editor” in the Menu Bar.  
• If you are using your set top box receiver to  
receive programmes (when the set top box  
receiver is connected to the recorder using a  
SCART cord only, page 17) and are able to  
receive the same programme with both the set top  
box receiver and the recorder, change the  
“Source” to receive the programme with the  
recorder’s tuner.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Approx. recording time  
(hours)  
Timer Recording (For analogue  
broadcasting only)  
*1  
Recording  
mode  
HDD  
DVD  
RDR- RDR- RDR- RDR-  
HXD HXD HXD HXD  
770 870 970 1070  
Before Recording  
HQ (High 25  
quality)  
34  
50  
68  
53  
105 1 hr.  
1 min.  
Before you start recording…  
• Check that the disc has enough available  
space for the recording (page 40). For the  
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you  
can free up disc space by erasing titles  
HSP  
R 37  
79  
155 1 hr.  
30 min.  
SP  
(Standard  
mode)  
51  
105 210  
2
• Adjust the recording picture quality if  
necessary (page 76).  
LSP  
r 63  
84  
130 265 2 hr.  
30 min.  
b Note  
To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment,  
finalise the disc (page 45).  
ESP  
LP  
r 75  
100 155 315  
3
r 100 135 210 420  
r 150 200 315 635  
r 200 270 425 850  
4
6
8
EP  
Recording mode  
SLP  
*2  
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of  
video tapes, you can select the desired  
recording mode using the REC MODE  
button.  
Recording modes with higher quality provide  
a more beautiful recording, but the large data  
volume also results in a shorter recording  
time.  
SEP  
255 340 530 1060 10  
(Long  
duration)  
*1  
The approximate recording time is for 12 cm  
DVD discs.  
The approximate recording times for DVD+R  
DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)  
discs are as follows:  
HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes  
HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes  
SP: 3 hours 35 minutes  
LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes  
Conversely, a longer duration provides a  
longer recording time, but the lower data  
volume results in a coarser picture quality.  
ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes  
LP: 7 hours 11 minutes  
EP: 10 hours 46 minutes  
SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes  
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the  
recording modes.  
To select further options for recording mode  
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec.  
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 141). To record  
pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on  
the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On  
(go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For  
details about manual recording mode, see  
For timer recording, you can also select  
“AUTO” as recording mode, which  
maximizes the recording quality for the space  
available on the disc (if recording to DVD),  
or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to  
HDD).  
SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes  
*2  
When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP  
is the longest recording time available. If you  
select SEP, the recording mode will  
automatically revert to SLP.  
z Hint  
To easily select a manual recording mode, press  
REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and  
select a manual recording mode using </,.  
,continued  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
b Notes  
ZWEITON (German stereo) system  
When a stereo-based programme is received,  
“Stereo” appears.  
When a bilingual ZWEITON-based  
programme is received, “L,” “R,” or “L+R”  
appears.  
• The maximum continuous recording time to the  
HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer  
than 12 hours is divided.  
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies  
with the recording time.  
– Recording a programme with poor reception, or  
a programme or video source of low picture  
quality.  
– Recording on a disc that has already been  
edited.  
– Recording only a still picture or just sound.  
• Programmes are recorded in the following aspect  
ratio.  
– In the original aspect ratio, when recording to  
the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is  
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode).  
– In 4:3 when recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.  
• When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode),  
the title is divided when the layer switches.  
NICAM system  
To record a NICAM programme, be sure to  
set “NICAM Select” to “NICAM” (default)  
in the “Audio In” setup. If the sound is not  
clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts,  
set “NICAM Select” to “Standard”  
z Hint  
You can select the audio (main or sub) while  
recording bilingual programmes using the AUDIO  
button. This does not affect the recorded sound.  
Unrecordable pictures  
Recording stereo and bilingual  
programmes  
Pictures with copy protection cannot be  
recorded on this recorder.  
Copy control Recordable discs  
signals  
The recorder automatically receives and  
records stereo and bilingual programmes  
based on the ZWEITON system or the  
NICAM system.  
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format”  
is set to “Video Mode Off” in the  
Copy-Free  
+
RW  
-
RWVR  
HDD  
-
+
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
“Recording” setup (page 144)) and a DVD-  
RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) can  
record both main and sub sounds. You can  
switch between main and sub when playing  
the disc.  
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format”  
is set to “Video Mode On” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 144)) and a DVD+RW, DVD+R,  
DVD-RW (Video mode), or DVD-R (Video  
mode) can record only one sound track (main  
or sub) at a time. Select the sound track in the  
“Audio In” setup before recording starts. Set  
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” (default) or  
“B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).  
About HDD Recording format, see page 144.  
Copy-Once  
HDD  
-
RWVR  
(CPRM*)  
(CPRM*)  
-
RVR  
Copy-Never  
None  
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM  
compatible equipment (page 10).  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1 Press GUIDE.  
Timer Recording (GUIDE  
Plus+/Manual)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
There are two methods to set the timer within  
the GUIDE Plus+ system: One Button  
Recording and setting the timer manually.  
You can set the timer for a total of 32  
programmes (8 programmes when using the  
VPS/PDC function), up to 30 days in  
advance.  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,.  
To search for a programme by category  
or by keyword, select “Search” in the  
information about searching for a  
programme.  
b Notes  
• When the recorder is connected to a set top box  
receiver and you want to record using the GUIDE  
Plus+ system, turn on the set top box receiver and  
connect the set top box controller.  
• Do not operate your set top box receiver just  
before or during a timer recording. This may  
prevent the accurate recording of a programme.  
You can select a programme from “My  
3 Press the red button (“Record”) or  
One Button Recording (GUIDE  
Plus+ (in the UK only))  
z REC.  
The set programme and Time Slot  
change colour and the recorder is ready  
to start recording. When recording from a  
set top box receiver, be sure to turn it on.  
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off  
the recorder before the timer recording  
starts.  
You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set  
the timer to record a programme up to seven  
days in advance.  
• To record on a DVD  
• To make more detailed timer settings  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
</M/m/,  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
,continued  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Rec. Mode Adjust  
Setting the timer manually  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 143).  
Number  
buttons  
If the timer settings overlap  
If one or more timer settings overlap, a  
message appears. To change the timer  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
z Hint  
If you are recording to the HDD, you can play the  
title as it is being recorded by selecting the  
programme title on the Title List (page 88).  
b Notes  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full  
appears on the screen, change the recording  
destination to “DVD,” or make available space  
for the recording (page 92).  
• If there is not enough available DVD disc space  
for the recording, the recorder automatically  
records the programme to the HDD even if you  
select “DVD” (Recovery Recording).  
• The last recording mode you selected manually  
becomes the default recording mode for timer  
recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
• You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or  
DVD) once the recording starts.  
1 Press GUIDE.  
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.  
The SCHEDULE list appears.  
3 Press the green button (“Manual”).  
• The beginning of some recordings may not be  
made when using the VPS/PDC function.  
• You cannot extend the recording duration time  
when “VPS/PDC” is selected (page 78).  
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works  
with a timer recording to DVD, and the VPS/PDC  
function set to off.  
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”  
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”  
4 Set the date using the number buttons  
and </M/m/,. Then press the  
green button (“Next”).  
5 Set the start time using the number  
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press  
the green button (“Next”).  
6 Set the stop time using the number  
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press  
the green button (“Next”).  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7 Select the input source using M/m,  
and select the programme position  
using the number buttons or M/m.  
You can also select the programme  
position using the yellow button  
(“Channels”).  
Using the Quick Timer function  
You can set the recorder to record in 30-  
minute increments.  
Press z REC repeatedly to set the  
duration.  
Each press advances the time in 30-minute  
increments. The maximum duration is six  
hours.  
8 Press the green button (“Next”).  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
To change the title name, select a  
character on the keyboard using </M/  
m/,, and press ENTER.  
To switch between upper-case, lower-  
case, or characters with accents, press the  
yellow button (“Keyboard”).  
(normal recording)  
The time counter decreases minute by minute  
to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the  
power turns off).  
9 Press the green button (“Save”).  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, etc. settings appear.  
The recorder is ready to start recording.  
To cancel the Quick Timer  
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter  
appears in the front panel display. The  
recorder returns to normal recording mode.  
To stop recording, press x REC STOP.  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
b Note  
If you turn off the recorder during recording,  
recording is stopped.  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”  
,continued  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To create your own setting  
Adjusting the recording picture  
quality  
1
Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or  
“Memory3” in step 3.  
2
Select “Detailed Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display for adjusting detailed  
settings appears.  
You can adjust the picture quality by  
selecting a preset setting. You can also adjust  
the picture quality by changing detailed  
settings, and store up to three settings in the  
memory.  
3
Select an item using M/m, and adjust  
settings using </,.  
For details about each setting, see the  
explanation of the display.  
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive  
video signal when “Component Video  
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).  
Select “Motion” for a picture, including  
subjects that move dynamically.  
Select “Still” for a picture with little  
movement.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive  
video signal to match the type of DVD  
software that you are watching when  
“Component Video Out” is set to  
“Progressive” (page 136).  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
DISPLAY  
Select “Auto” to detect the software type  
(Film-based or Video-based)  
automatically and select the appropriate  
conversion mode. Normally select this  
position.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and  
press ENTER.  
Select “Off” to fix the conversion mode  
to the mode for Video-based software.  
“3-D Y/C”: Adjusts the brightness/  
colour separation for the video signals.  
Select “Motion” for a picture, including  
subjects that move dynamically.  
Select “Still” for a picture with little  
movement.  
“YNR” (luminance noise reduction):  
Reduces noise contained in the  
luminance element of the video signal.  
“CNR” (chroma noise reduction):  
Reduces noise contained in the chroma  
element of the video signal.  
3 Select a preset setting, and press  
ENTER.  
“Tuner”: TV broadcasts  
“VCR”: Video cassettes  
“DTV”: Digital broadcasts  
“Memory1”/“Memory2”/“Memory3”:  
Your own settings. To create your own  
To check the detailed settings for the  
selected preset, press DISPLAY.  
“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of  
images outlines.  
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
“White AGC”: Turn on for automatic  
white level adjustment.  
“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity  
of white.  
“Black Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity  
of black.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
“Black Level”: Selects the black level  
(setup level) for the NTSC video signals.  
Select “ON” to raise the standard black  
level. Select this when the picture  
appears too dark.  
Select “OFF” to set the black level of the  
input signals to the standard level.  
Normally, select this position.  
“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance.  
“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours  
deeper or lighter.  
Checking/Changing/  
Cancelling Timer  
Settings  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
You can change or cancel timer settings using  
the SCHEDULE list.  
4
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
The setting is automatically stored as the  
setting you selected in step 1.  
Number  
buttons  
Creating chapters in a title  
Colour  
buttons  
GUIDE  
The recorder can automatically divide a  
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting  
chapter marks. To select chapter mark  
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto  
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter  
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)”  
in the “Recording” setup (page 143).  
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR  
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can  
edit chapter marks (page 95).  
</M/m/,  
Changing timer settings  
1 Press GUIDE.  
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.  
The SCHEDULE list appears.  
,continued  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
3 Select the timer setting you want to  
change using M/m, and press the  
green button (“Edit”).  
• The new settings become effective when you exit  
the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
• When you set the recording destination to  
“HDDr,” the previous timer recording will be  
replaced with the new one even if you have not  
watched it.  
About the VPS/PDC function  
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV  
programmes in some broadcast systems.  
These signals ensure that timer recordings are  
made regardless of any broadcast delays,  
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.  
To use the VPS/PDC function  
Select “VPS / PDC” in step 7 above.  
When you turn on this function, the recorder  
starts scanning the channels before the timer  
recording starts.  
4 In the left column, select an item  
using the red button (“Back”) or the  
green button (“Next”), and adjust  
using the number buttons or </M/m/  
,.  
You can change the date, start time, stop  
time, programme position, or input  
source.  
Cancelling timer settings  
1 Press GUIDE.  
The cursor moves to the right column.  
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.  
5 Press the corresponding colour button  
repeatedly to change settings.  
• Yellow button (“Destination”): Sets the  
recording destination. If there is not  
enough available DVD disc space for  
the recording, the recorder  
The SCHEDULE list appears.  
3 Select the timer setting you want to  
cancel using M/m, and press the red  
button (“Delete”).  
automatically records the programme  
to the HDD even if you select “DVD”  
(Recovery Recording). When you set a  
daily or weekly timer, “HDDr” allows  
you to replace the previous timer  
recording with the new one  
automatically (HDD only).  
• Green button (“Frequency”): Selects  
the recording pattern.  
To close the SCHEDULE list  
Press GUIDE.  
When the timer settings overlap  
• The programme that starts first has priority  
and the entire programme is recorded.  
• After finishing the previous recording, the  
other recording starts with several tens-of-  
second’s delay (when the end-time of one  
recording and the start-time of another are  
the same).  
• When the recordings start at the same time,  
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel  
the timer setting for the programme that you  
are not going to record.  
• Red button (“Quality”): Selects the  
recording mode (page 71).  
6 Press , to display “Timing.”  
7 Press the green button (“Timing”)  
repeatedly to select the duration time  
or to set the VPS/PDC function.  
below.  
b Note  
When “VPS / PDC” is set for one or more timer  
recordings, the start times may change in the event  
of a broadcast delay or early start.  
• If you want to record to a particular  
HDD genre, press the yellow button  
(“Genre”) repeatedly.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Select the desired audio signal when  
recording a bilingual programme to  
the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video  
mode).  
Recording from  
Connected Equipment  
Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and  
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R”  
in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
You can record from a connected VCR or  
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar  
Device” on page 31. Use the DV IN jack on  
the front panel if the equipment has a DV  
output jack (i.LINK jack).  
the recording mode.  
For details about the recording mode, see  
5 Insert the source tape into the  
connected equipment and set to  
playback pause.  
HDD  
DVD  
6 Press z REC.  
This recorder starts recording.  
INPUT  
7 Press the pause (or play) button on the  
connected equipment to cancel the  
playback pause status.  
The connected equipment starts playback  
and the playback image is recorded by  
this recorder.  
To stop recording, press x REC STOP  
on this recorder.  
If you connect a digital video camera with  
a DV IN jack  
for an explanation of how to record from the  
DV IN jack.  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
REC MODE  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
z Hint  
You can adjust the settings for the recording picture  
If you select DVD, insert a recordable  
b Notes  
2 Press INPUT to select an input source  
according to the connection you  
made.  
• When recording a video game image, the screen  
may not be clear.  
• Any programme that contains a Copy-Never copy  
guard signal cannot be recorded.  
• When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or  
“B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound when  
playing in the following cases.  
The front panel display changes as  
follows:  
programme position  
– When recording in PCM mode.  
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD Recording  
Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD+RW/  
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
• You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is  
set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Select a title using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Playback  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
Playing the Recorded  
Programme/DVD  
To use the DVD’s Menu  
When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalised  
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode),  
DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode), you can  
display the disc’s menu by pressing TOP  
MENU or MENU.  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
*
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
*
DATA CD  
b Note  
* DivX video file only  
The H button is not available in the disc’s menu.  
To play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs with  
PBC functions  
PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play  
VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs  
interactively using the menu on your TV  
screen.  
HDD  
DVD  
Number  
buttons  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
CLEAR  
MENU  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
When you start playing a VIDEO CD/Super  
VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the menu  
appears.  
Select an item using the number buttons, and  
press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions  
in the menu (press H when “Press  
SELECT” appears).  
TITLE LIST/  
TOP MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
DISPLAY  
/
.
>
H/X/x  
b Note  
Some playback options such as search, repeat play  
or programme play cannot be played with PBC  
function. To play with playback options, start  
playback without PBC functions using the Title  
List.  
PLAY  
MODE  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
To change the angles  
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene  
• If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.  
are recorded on the disc, “  
” appears on  
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO  
CD, DATA DVD or DATA CD, press  
H. Playback starts.  
the screen. Press ANGLE during playback.  
To switch the angle mark indicator to off, set  
“Angle Indicator” to “Off” in the “Playback”  
setup (page 145).  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
For details about the Title List, see “3.  
To stop playback  
Press x.  
Example: HDD  
To playback quickly with sound (Scan  
Audio)  
When you press M during playback, you  
can play quickly with dialogue or sound  
(except for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO  
CDs).  
No sound is output when you press M two  
or more times to change search speed.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
To display the registration code for this  
recorder  
Select “Registration Code” of “DivX” in the  
“Options” setup (page 150).  
To lock the recorder (Child Lock)  
You can lock all of the buttons on the  
recorder so that the settings are not cancelled  
by mistake.  
When the recorder is turned off, hold down x  
on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in  
the front panel display. The recorder does not  
work except for timer recordings while the  
Child Lock is set.  
To resume playback from the point where  
you stopped (Resume Play)  
When you press H again after you stop  
playback, the recorder resumes playback  
from the point where you pressed x.  
To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the  
recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the  
front panel display.  
To start from the beginning, press x again,  
and press H. Playback starts from the  
beginning of the title/track/scene.  
One-Touch Play (for SCART/HDMI  
connections only)  
Press H. With one touch of the H button,  
the recorder and your TV automatically turn  
on and the TV’s input is switched to the  
recorder. Playback starts automatically.  
The point where you stopped playing is  
cleared when:  
– you open the disc tray (except HDD).  
– you play another title (except HDD).  
– you switch the Title List to Original or  
Playlist (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode  
only).  
– you edit the title after stopping playback.  
– you change the settings on the recorder.  
– you make a recording (except HDD/DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode).  
z Hint  
You can also use the H button in step 3 (page 80)  
to start playback.  
b Note  
When using the HDMI connection, there may be a  
delay, before the playback picture appears on the  
TV screen, and the beginning portion of the  
playback picture may not be displayed.  
– you disconnect the mains lead.  
b Notes  
• You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.  
• Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO  
CDs.  
To play restricted DVDs (Parental Lock)  
If you play a restricted DVD, the display for  
entering your password appears on your TV  
screen.  
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts playback.  
To register or change the password, see  
,continued  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback options  
To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 80.  
Buttons  
Operations  
AUDIO  
Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed  
repeatedly in normal playback mode.  
-
-
RWVR  
RVR  
HDD  
*
*
: Selects the language.  
DVD DATA DVD DATA CD  
*
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
-
: Selects the main or sub sound.  
-
RWVR  
RVR  
HDD  
VCD  
*
DATA CD  
: Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.  
* DivX video file only  
SUBTITLE  
*
Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly.  
*
DVD DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
* DivX video file only  
/
(instant replay/  
Each time you press  
duration.  
, replays the scene for the following  
instant advance)  
5 seconds t 15 seconds t 30 seconds t 1 minute t  
2 minutes t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t  
20 minutes t advances the time in 10-minute increments t  
2 hours  
Each time you press  
, briefly fast forwards the current scene  
for the following duration.  
30 seconds t 1 minute t 1 minute 30 seconds t 2 minutes t  
3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t 20 minutes t  
advances the time in 10-minute increments t 2 hours  
. (previous)/  
> (next)  
Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scene/track  
when pressed during playback.  
Goes to the beginning of the first title/track when pressed in stop  
mode.  
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback.  
Search speed changes as follows:  
(fast reverse/fast forward)  
fast reverse fast forward  
*1  
*2  
mFR1  
T
t MFF1  
mFR2 T T t t MFF2  
mFR3 T T T t t t MFF3  
mFR4 T T T T t t t t MFF4  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse  
continues at the selected speed until you release the button.  
*1  
When you press m once during playback, you can play Reverse  
play (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/DivX video  
files).  
When you press M once during playback, you can play quickly  
*2  
with sound (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs).  
Not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs.  
*3  
To resume normal playback, press H.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Buttons  
Operations  
Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in  
pause mode.  
(slow, freeze frame)  
Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode.  
To resume normal playback, press H.  
-
+
RWVR  
RW  
HDD  
+
-
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
R
*1  
-
RVideo  
VCD  
DVD  
*1*2  
*1*2  
DATA DVD  
*1  
DATA CD  
Playback direction only  
DivX video file only  
*2  
X (pause)  
Pauses playback.  
To resume normal playback, press H.  
b Notes  
• Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles  
recorded on this recorder.  
• JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder  
can only be played as a slideshow. For video files  
containing JPEG image files and movies, the  
recorder can play movie parts only.  
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound  
track  
DTS audio signals are output only through the  
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.  
When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set  
“DTS Output” to “On” in the “Audio Out” setup  
,continued  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing a specific portion  
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)  
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)  
You can play repeatedly all the titles/tracks/  
files or a single title/chapter/track on the  
HDD or a disc.  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
ENTER.  
“Set point A” is selected.  
2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select an item to be repeated using M/  
m.  
“Repeat Title” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA  
*1  
*1  
DVDs /DATA CDs ): repeats the  
current title.  
“Repeat Chapter” (for HDD/DVDs):  
repeats the current chapter.  
*2  
“Repeat Track” (for VIDEO CDs ):  
repeats the current track.  
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current  
programme (page 85).  
“Repeat Disc” (for VIDEO CDs /DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)): repeats all of  
3 While monitoring the sound, press  
ENTER at the starting point (point A) of  
the portion to be played repeatedly.  
“Set point B” is selected.  
*2  
4 Continue playing to locate the ending  
point (point B), and press ENTER.  
A-B Repeat starts.  
the tracks on a disc.  
*1  
DivX video file only  
Available only when playing without PBC  
*2  
functions  
4 Press ENTER.  
To cancel A-B Repeat  
Repeat play starts.  
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off”  
in the “Play Mode” menu.  
To cancel Repeat play  
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat  
Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
z Hint  
You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in  
the System Menu.  
z Hint  
b Note  
You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the  
System Menu.  
When playing an HDD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW  
(Video mode)/DVD-R (Video mode), set the start  
and stop points within the same title.  
b Note  
You cannot select “Repeat Programme” when no  
programme remains.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To cancel Programme play  
Creating your own programme  
(Programme)  
Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set  
“Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play”  
in the “Play Mode” menu.  
*
*
-
-
RVideo  
HDD RWVideo  
VCD  
To erase the programme  
* finalised disc only  
Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set  
“Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in  
the “Play Mode” menu.  
You can play the contents of the HDD or a  
disc in the order you want by arranging the  
order of the titles/chapters/albums/tracks on  
the HDD or disc to create your own  
programme. You can make a programme of  
up to 24 steps.  
z Hints  
• The program you made remains after Programme  
play finishes. To play the same program again, set  
“Programme” to “Start Programme Play” in the  
“Play Mode” menu. However, the programme is  
cleared after you remove the disc or press [/1.  
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to  
“Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select “Programme,” and press  
ENTER.  
• You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode”  
in the System Menu.  
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and  
Adjusting the picture quality  
press ENTER.  
The “Input/Edit Programme” display  
differs depending upon the disc type.  
Example: DVD  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
*
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
*
DATA CD  
* DivX video file only  
You can adjust the picture quality from  
connected equipment, such as a TV or  
projector by selecting a preset setting. You  
can also adjust the picture quality by  
changing detailed settings, and store up to  
three settings in the memory.  
4 Select a title or album (example: Title  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU during playback  
or in pause mode.  
001) using M/m, and press ENTER.  
5 Select a chapter or track (example:  
Chapter 01) using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and  
press ENTER.  
The chapter or track is programmed.  
If you make a mistake, select the step  
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,  
and press CLEAR.  
3 Select a preset setting using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
Dynamic: produces a bold dynamic  
picture by increasing the picture contrast  
and the colour intensity.  
Standard: displays a standard picture.  
Professional: displays an original picture.  
Memory1/Memory2/Memory3: Your  
own settings. To create your own  
below.  
6 To programme other chapters or  
tracks, press </M/m/, to select a  
step number, and repeat steps 4 and  
5.  
7 Press H.  
Programme play starts.  
,continued  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To check the detailed settings for the  
selected preset, press DISPLAY.  
“MNR” (mosquito noise reduction):  
Reduces the faint noise appearing around  
the outlines of the images. The noise  
reduction effects are automatically  
adjusted within each setting range  
according to the video bit rate and other  
factors.  
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
To create your own setting  
“Sharpness”: Sharpens the outlines of the  
images.  
“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of  
images outlines.  
“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity  
of white.  
“Black Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity  
of black.  
1
2
Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or  
“Memory3” in step 3.  
Select “Detailed Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display for adjusting detailed  
settings appears.  
“Black Level”: Selects the black level  
(setup level) for the video signals.  
Select “ON” to raise the standard black  
level. Select this when the picture  
appears too dark.  
Select “OFF” to set the black level of the  
input signals to the standard level.  
Normally, select this position.  
“Gamma Correction”: Adjusts how dark  
areas look.  
“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance.  
“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours  
deeper or lighter.  
3
Select an item using M/m, and adjust  
settings using </,.  
For details about each setting, see the  
explanation of the display.  
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive  
video signal when “Component Video  
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).  
Select “Motion” for a picture, including  
subjects that move dynamically.  
Select “Still” for a picture with little  
movement.  
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive  
video signal to match the type of DVD  
software that you are watching when  
“Component Video Out” is set to  
“Progressive” (page 136).  
Select “Auto1” to automatically detect  
the software type (Film-based or Video-  
based) and select the appropriate  
conversion mode. Normally select this  
position.  
4
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
The setting is automatically stored as the  
setting you selected in step 1.  
b Notes  
• If the outlines of the images on your screen  
become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to  
“Off.”  
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,  
the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to  
discern. Also, these functions may not work with  
some screen sizes.  
• The following settings are not available for the  
signals output from the HDMI jack.  
– “Sharpness”  
– “White Enhancer”  
– “Black Enhancer”  
– “Black Level”  
– “Gamma Correction”  
If the picture appears unnatural, select  
“Auto2,” “On,” or “Off.”  
“YNR” (luminance noise reduction):  
Reduces noise contained in the  
luminance element of the video signal.  
“BNR” (block noise reduction): Reduces  
“block noise” or mosaic-like patterns in  
the picture.  
– “Hue”  
– “Chroma Level”  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 While viewing a TV broadcast, press  
TV PAUSE.  
Pausing a TV Broadcast  
(TV Pause/Pause Live TV)  
The picture pauses, and the recorder  
starts recording the current TV channel  
to the HDD.  
It may take up to 10 seconds to start  
recording.  
HDD  
You can pause a current TV broadcast, and  
record it on the HDD, then continue watching  
the programme at a later time. This is useful  
when you receive an unexpected phone call  
or visitor while watching TV.  
When connecting the recorder to your TV  
using the SCART jack, do the followings.  
– set “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder  
Only” in the “Options” setup (page 150).  
– set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 150).  
2 Press H to resume watching the  
programme.  
You can fast forward/fast reverse, pause,  
or stop the programme using m/M,  
X and x without affecting the recording.  
3 Press x REC STOP to stop recording.  
b Notes  
• The picture does not pause and the recorder starts  
only recording in the following cases.  
– when the programme positions are preset  
differently between the recorder and the  
connected TV.  
– preset programme positions by  
downloading from your TV using  
“Download from TV” of “Auto Channel  
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup  
If you do not make the SCART connection,  
set “TV Pause” to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 150).  
– when watching the programme from the  
external equipment connected to your TV.  
• The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when  
“TV Pause” is set to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 150).  
• You may not be able to use the “TV Pause”  
function depending on some TVs. For details,  
refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
your TV.  
• The “TV Pause” function will not work correctly  
when watching TV via the connected component  
such as a VCR or digital tuner. The “TV Pause”  
function works only with the channel selected on  
the TV.  
• You cannot use the “TV Pause” function as a  
recording feature from the component (VCR,  
etc.) connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack.  
• The “TV Pause” function will not work if the  
connected TV does not comply with  
SMARTLINK. To check whether your TV  
complies with SMARTLINK, refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with your TV.  
M
m
H/X/x  
TV PAUSE  
x REC  
STOP  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing from the  
Playing a Previous  
Recording While Making  
Another (Simultaneous  
Rec and Play)  
Beginning of the  
Programme You Are  
Recording (Chase Play)  
+
RW  
+
R
HDD  
-
-
HDD  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
“Chase Play” allows you to view the recorded  
part of a programme on the HDD while the  
recording is being made. You do not need to  
wait until the recording finishes.  
DATA CD  
“Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to  
view a previously recorded programme while  
recording programmes. Playback continues  
even if a timer recording starts. Use this  
function as follows:  
• While recording to the HDD:  
Play another title on the HDD.  
Play a previously recorded programme on a  
DVD by pressing the DVD button.  
• While recording to a DVD:  
Play a previously recorded programme on  
the HDD by pressing the HDD button.  
You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO  
CD, Super VIDEO CD, DATA DVD, or  
DATA CD while recording on the HDD.  
H
HDD  
DVD  
Press H while recording.  
Playback starts from the beginning of the  
programme you are recording.  
When you fast forward to the point that you  
are recording, “Chase Play” returns to normal  
playback.  
TITLE LIST  
M/m,  
ENTER  
Example: Play another title on the HDD  
while recording to the HDD.  
1
While recording, press TITLE LIST to  
display the HDD Title List.  
2
Select the title you want to play, and  
press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Example: Play a DVD while recording to  
the HDD.  
Searching for a Time/  
1
2
3
While recording, press DVD and insert  
the DVD into the recorder.  
Title/Chapter/Track, etc.  
Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD  
Title List.  
+
RW  
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RWVR RWVideo  
*
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
Select the title you want to play, and  
press ENTER.  
*
DATA CD  
* DivX video file only  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene  
or track. As titles and tracks are assigned  
individual numbers, select the title or track by  
entering its number. You can also search for  
a scene using the time code.  
b Note  
You cannot play a DVD, DivX video or VIDEO  
CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while  
recording on the HDD in the PAL/SECAM colour  
system.  
Number  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
PLAY  
MODE  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select a search method, and press  
ENTER.  
“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA  
*1  
*1  
*2  
DVDs /DATA CDs /VIDEO CDs ):  
Searches for a starting point by entering  
the time code.  
“Title Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA  
*1  
*1  
DVDs /DATA CDs  
)
“Chapter Search” (for HDD/DVDs)  
*3  
“Track Search” (for VIDEO CDs  
)
*1  
DivX video file only  
Except Super VIDEO CDs  
*2  
*3  
Available only when playing without PBC  
functions  
,continued  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The display for entering the number  
appears.  
Example: Chapter Search  
4 Press the number buttons to select the  
number of the title, chapter, time  
code, etc., you want.  
For example: Time Search  
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes,  
and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”  
If you make a mistake, select another  
number.  
5 Press ENTER.  
The recorder starts playback from the  
selected number.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing and Editing  
Before Editing  
This recorder offers various edit options for  
various disc types.  
b Notes  
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove  
the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.  
• DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot  
be edited on this recorder.  
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s  
control information is full, erase or edit  
unnecessary titles.  
• The remaining disc space displayed on the screen  
may differ from the actual remaining disc space.  
• When editing a DVD+R or DVD-R, finish all  
editing before finalising the disc. You cannot edit  
a finalised disc.  
-
RWVR  
HDD  
+
RW  
-
RVR  
-
RWVideo  
Edit features  
+
R
Original Playlist  
title  
title  
-
RVideo  
Title edit Erase (page 92)  
Title Name (page 92)  
Set Thumbnail (page 92)  
A-B Erase (page 93)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Set Genre (page 92)  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Combine (page 97)  
Genre Name (page 92)  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Creating a Playlist (page 96)  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Chapter  
edit  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
,continued  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To open up disc space  
To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or  
DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with  
the largest number in the title list.  
Erasing and Editing a  
Title  
Largest title number  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
This section explains the basic edit functions.  
Note that editing is irreversible. To edit  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) without  
changing the original recordings, create a  
Playlist title (page 96).  
To open up disc space on the HDD or a DVD-  
RW (VR mode), you can erase any title.  
For DVD-Rs and DVD+Rs, the available disc  
space does not increase even if you erase  
titles.  
To switch between the Playlist and  
Original Title List (DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR  
mode only)  
You can display the Playlist titles in the Title  
List (Playlist), or the Original titles in the  
Title List (Original).  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RETURN  
/
O
.
m
M
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
X
displayed.  
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Select “Original” or “Play List” using M/  
m, and press ENTER.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,  
switch the Title List (Original or  
Playlist), if necessary.  
About editing accuracy  
When editing the titles recorded on the HDD,  
you can select the type of editing.  
“Video Mode Compatible Editing”:  
Recommended if you are going to dub the  
titles to DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode)  
or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs afterward by High-  
speed dubbing. The editing points and  
chapter marks may be slightly different from  
those you selected.  
2 Select a title, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can make the following edits to the  
title.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select  
“Yes” when asked for confirmation.  
“Edit”: Allows you to make the  
following edits.  
• “Title Name”: Allows you to enter or  
re-enter a title name (page 42).  
• “Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s  
thumbnail picture that appears in the  
Title List (page 39).  
“Frame Accurate Editing”:  
Recommended when you want to edit titles  
precisely. However, the editing points may  
be slightly different from the point you  
selected when you dub the titles by High-  
speed dubbing.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
• “A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the  
title (page 93).  
• “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles  
4 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box.  
To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters in a title  
• “Set Genre”: Assigns a genre to a title.  
5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles  
you want to edit.  
• “Protect”: Protects the title. “  
6 When you finish selecting titles, press  
appears next to the protected title.  
• “Move”: Changes the title’s playing  
order (page 97).  
,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
• “Combine”: Combines two titles into  
7 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected titles.  
“Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a  
genre name (up to 12 characters)  
“Multi-Mode”: Allows you to select and  
edit multiple titles at one time (page 93).  
“Create”: Creates a Playlist (page 96).  
“Undo”: Undoes the last edit you made.  
“Protect”: Protects the titles. “  
appears next to the protected title.  
“Unprotected”: Unprotects the titles.  
“Change Genre”: Changes the genre of  
the titles.  
z Hint  
You can exit “Multi-Mode” by pressing , and  
selecting “Single-Mode” while selecting titles.  
z Hint  
You can label or re-label DVDs (page 43).  
Erasing a section of a title  
(A-B Erase)  
Editing multiple titles (Multi-  
Mode)  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
HDD  
You can select a section (scene) in a title and  
erase it. Note that erasing scenes in a title  
cannot be undone.  
You can select and edit up to 24 titles at one  
time.  
1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Title,” select “Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
2 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
2 Select “A-B Erase,” and press ENTER.  
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and  
press ENTER. For details, see page 92.  
The display for setting point A appears.  
The title starts to play.  
3 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display for selecting titles to be  
edited appears.  
,continued  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
3 Select point A using m/M, and  
press X.  
Dividing a title (Divide)  
• To return to the beginning of the title,  
press X and then press ..  
*
*
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do  
not want to reduce the picture quality, divide  
the title into two shorter titles. Note that  
dividing a title cannot be undone.  
* Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs in VR mode.  
4 Select “From,” and press ENTER.  
The position of point A is displayed, and  
the title re-starts playing.  
5 Select point B using m/M, and  
press X.  
6 Select “To,” and press ENTER.  
Title,” select “Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
The position of point B is displayed.  
7 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The scene is erased.  
2 Select “Divide,” and press ENTER.  
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and  
press ENTER. For details, see page 92.  
The display for setting the dividing point  
appears.  
To cancel “A-B Erase”  
Press O RETURN. The Title List appears.  
The title starts to play.  
z Hint  
A chapter mark is inserted after the scene is erased.  
The chapter mark divides the title into separate  
chapters on either side of the mark.  
b Notes  
• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted  
at the point where you erase a section of a title.  
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be  
erased.  
3 Select the dividing point using m/  
M, and press X.  
• To return to the beginning of the title,  
press X and then press ..  
4 Press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The title is divided into two.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can make the following edits to the  
chapter.  
Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter  
“Divide”: Divides a chapter into two  
“Erase/Move”  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
• “Erase”: Erases the selected chapter  
You can edit individual chapters within a  
title. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
without changing the original recordings,  
create a Playlist (page 96).  
• “Move” (for Playlist titles on DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode): Changes  
the chapter’s playing order (page 97).  
“Combine”: Combines two chapters into  
Dividing a chapter (Divide)  
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter,” select “Divide.”  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
.
m
M
X
2 Select a chapter using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
The chapter starts to play.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
3 Select the dividing point using m/  
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,  
switch the Title List (Original or  
Playlist), if necessary.  
M, and press X.  
• To return to the beginning of the  
chapter, press X and then press ..  
2 Select a title containing the chapter  
you want to edit, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Press ENTER.  
The chapter is divided into two.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Chapter Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and  
press ENTER. For details, see page 92.  
,continued  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Erasing a chapter (Erase)  
Creating and Editing a  
Playlist  
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter,” select “Erase/Move.”  
-
RWVR  
-
RVR  
Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit  
without changing the actual recordings. You  
can create up to 99 Playlist titles.  
b Note  
Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the  
“Copy-Once” copy protection signal cannot be  
dubbed or moved (page 99).  
2 Select a chapter using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
3 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
4 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The chapter is erased.  
TITLE LIST  
Combining multiple chapters  
(Combine)  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter,” select “Combine.”  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).  
2 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Create,” and press ENTER.  
The original titles in the Title List appear.  
4 Select an original title to add to the  
2 Move the combining bar using </  
,, and press ENTER.  
Playlist, and press ENTER.  
The selected title is added to the Playlist.  
The two adjacent chapters of the  
combining bar are combined.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of  
the titles you want to add to the  
Playlist.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Moving a Playlist title (Move)  
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)  
You can divide a Playlist title. For  
instructions, see page 94.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).  
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Moving a chapter (Move)  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).  
2 Select a Playlist title containing the  
chapter you want to edit, and press  
,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Chapter Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
5 Select a new location for the title  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
5 Select “Erase/Move.”  
The title moves to the new location.  
• To move more titles, repeat from step 2.  
Combining multiple Playlist  
titles (Combine)  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).  
6 Select a chapter using </,, and  
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.  
press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
7 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
8 Select a new location for the chapter  
4 Select “Combine,” and press ENTER.  
using </,, and press ENTER.  
The chapter moves to the new location.  
5 Select a title you want to combine.  
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The titles are combined.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• The chapter marks in the dubbing source  
are dubbed. The position of chapter marks  
may be slightly changed from the original.  
However, the chapter marks in the dubbing  
source are not retained in the dubbed title  
when dubbing to a DVD-RW/DVD-R  
(Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD+R at  
normal speed. The chapter marks are  
automatically inserted according to the  
“Auto Chapter (Video)” and “Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW)” settings in the  
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)  
Before Dubbing  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying  
a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive  
(HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.” You  
can dub a playing title using the HDD/DVD  
page 99) or you can select to dub multiple  
titles all at once (see “Dubbing Using  
dub an entire DVD disc to make a backup  
“Recording” setup (page 143).  
• The “Set Thumbnail” setting in the dubbing  
source is dubbed as a thumbnail picture  
marker (except when dubbing from a  
DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)). The  
position of thumbnail picture markers may  
be slightly changed from the original.  
z Hint  
Before you start, read the following  
precautions, which are common to all  
dubbing methods.  
When you dub a Playlist title, it is recorded as an  
Original title.  
b Notes  
If you want to record from a digital video  
camera connected to the DV IN jack, see  
To record from equipment connected to the  
• You cannot make a recording while dubbing.  
• Before playing a dubbed disc on other DVD  
equipment, finalise the disc (page 45, 100).  
• You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs or finalised  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode) to the HDD.  
• Titles containing mixed aspect ratios cannot be  
dubbed to a DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (Video mode) using the HDD/DVD  
DUB button.  
Before you start…  
• You cannot record both the main and sub  
sound on the HDD (when “HDD Recording  
Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the  
“Recording” setup), DVD+RWs, DVD-  
RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs  
(Video mode). For bilingual programmes,  
set “Bilingual Recording” to either “A/L”  
(default) or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup  
(page 138). About HDD Recording format,  
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be dubbed to single-  
layer DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.  
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes) 16:9  
size titles cannot be dubbed to a DVD+RW/  
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
• When dubbing to a DVD+R DL, DVD-R DL  
(Video mode) in Real-Time Dubbing mode, the  
dubbing contents are divided into titles.  
• A title name in the dubbing source is  
dubbed. However, only up to 40 characters  
of a title name are dubbed when dubbing  
from the HDD to a DVD+RW/DVD-RW  
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video  
mode).  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dubbing restriction  
You cannot dub movies and other DVD  
VIDEOs to the HDD. Also, when dubbing  
from a DVD to the HDD, scenes that contain  
a copy protection signal cannot be recorded.  
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy  
protection signals can be moved only from  
the HDD to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR  
mode)* (after the title is moved, the original  
title in the HDD is erased). The “Move”  
function is performed using Dubbing List.  
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy  
HDD/DVD Dubbing  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can dub a single title by pressing the  
HDD/DVD DUB button during playback.  
1 Start playback of a title.  
For playing a title, see “Playing the  
protection signals are indicated with  
.
2 Press HDD/DVD DUB.  
Copy  
protection  
signals  
Dubbing  
The recorder starts dubbing the current  
playing title from the beginning.  
The recorder turns off automatically  
when you do not use the recorder for  
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing  
has finished.  
Copy-Free  
(No copy  
protection  
signal)  
-
+
RWVR  
RW  
,
,
HDD  
HDD  
-
+
R
RWVideo  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
Copy-Once  
*
*
-
RWVR  
,
To cancel the dubbing  
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more  
than one second.  
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,  
no part of the title will be moved to the  
dubbing target. However, note that this will  
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-  
Rs.  
-
RVR  
* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode) only.  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable  
Media) is a coding technology that protects  
copyrights for images.  
b Notes  
• Protected titles in the HDD cannot be moved.  
• The “Move” function is not available for HDD/  
DVD DUB dubbing.  
About dubbing mode  
Titles on the HDD are dubbed to a disc at  
high speed (High-speed dubbing).  
Titles on a disc are dubbed to the HDD at  
normal speed (Real-Time dubbing).  
• Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy  
protection signal, the recording restrictions on  
that title are retained.  
To convert the recording mode (only when  
dubbing from a disc to the HDD)  
After step 1, press REC MODE to select the  
recording mode.  
b Note  
You cannot use the HDD/DVD DUB button in the  
following cases. Dub the title using Dubbing List  
– When dubbing the title recorded in MN6 mode or  
longer duration mode to a DVD+RW/DVD+R.  
– When dubbing the title recorded in HQ+ mode to  
a DVD.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D Total size of the selected titles and  
available space on the disc to be  
dubbed (approximate)  
Dubbing Using Dubbing  
List  
E Selected title’s thumbnail picture  
+
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
RW  
5 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The selected title changes colour.  
When you select “HDD -> DVD” in step  
3, you can change the title order or search  
for a title by genre (see “3. Playing the  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can select the titles you want to dub  
using Dubbing List. You can also edit titles  
before dubbing without changing the original  
titles.  
6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles  
in the order you want to dub.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
7 Select “Next” using ,, and press  
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
3 Select a dubbing direction, and press  
The “Title Edit” display appears.  
For details about editing, see “To edit  
ENTER.  
To dub titles from the HDD to a disc,  
select “HDD -> DVD.”  
8 Select “Next” using ,, and press  
To dub titles from a disc to the HDD,  
select “DVD/CD -> HDD.”  
ENTER.  
The “Start Dubbing” display appears.  
4 Select “Create New Dubbing List,”  
and press ENTER.  
The Dubbing List appears.  
• If you have previously saved a Dubbing  
List and want to resume editing it,  
select “Use Previous Dubbing List,”  
and go to step 7.  
9 Select an option using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The options differ depending on the  
dubbing direction or disc type.  
“Recording Mode”: Changes the  
dubbing mode of all selected titles at a  
time using M/m (page 71).  
“Input Disc Name”: Changes the disc  
name (page 42).  
A Direction of dubbing  
“Finalise”: Select “Yes” to finalise a disc  
automatically after dubbing (DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (Video mode), or DVD+R).  
B Total number of titles to be dubbed  
C Dubbing step number  
Display 1: Select a title you want to  
dub (the “Select Titles” display).  
Display 2: Edit a title (the “Title  
Edit” display).  
Display 3: Confirm the settings and  
start dubbing (the “Start Dubbing”  
display).  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Required times for High-speed Dubbing from  
HDD to DVD (for 60-minute programme)  
10 Select “Start Dubbing,” and press  
ENTER.  
*1  
When you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step  
9, select the title menu style, and press  
ENTER.  
The recorder turns off automatically  
when you do not use the recorder for  
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing  
has finished.  
*2  
Speed  
6x  
2.4x  
2x  
High-speed  
DVD+RW/ DVD+R  
DVD-RW/ (Double  
DVD+R/  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
(Dual  
Layer)  
Rec.  
mode  
Layer)  
HQ  
Approx.  
10 min.  
Approx.  
25 min.  
Approx.  
30 min.  
To cancel dubbing  
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more  
than one second.  
HSP  
Approx.  
6 min.  
40 sec.  
Approx.  
16 min.  
40 sec.  
Approx.  
20 min.  
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,  
no part of the title will be moved to the  
dubbing target. However, note that this will  
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-  
Rs.  
SP  
Approx.  
5 min.  
Approx.  
12 min.  
30 sec.  
Approx.  
15 min.  
LSP  
ESP  
Approx.  
4 min.  
Approx.  
10 min.  
Approx.  
12 min.  
Approx.  
3 min.  
20 sec.  
Approx.  
8 min.  
20 sec.  
Approx.  
10 min.  
About dubbing mode  
” appears next to the title that can be  
dubbed at high speed (High-speed dubbing)  
in the “Title Edit” display. The following  
titles are dubbed at normal speed (Real-Time  
dubbing).  
LP  
Approx.  
2 min.  
30 sec.  
Approx.  
6 min.  
15 sec.  
Approx.  
7 min.  
30 sec.  
– Titles containing both main and sub sounds  
(except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)).  
– Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3  
and 16:9, etc.) (except for DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (VR mode)).  
– Titles recorded on DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs  
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video  
mode).  
EP  
Approx.  
1 min.  
40 sec.  
Approx.  
60 min.  
Approx.  
5 min.  
*3  
*3  
SLP  
SEP  
Approx.  
1 min.  
Approx.  
Approx.  
3 min.  
45 sec.  
*3  
60 min.  
*3  
15 sec.  
Approx.  
Approx.  
Approx.  
*3  
*3  
*3  
1 min.  
60 min.  
3 min.  
– 16:9 size titles recorded on DVD+RW/  
DVD+R.  
*1  
The values in the above table are for reference  
only. Actual times for dubbing also require time  
for creating disc’s control information and other  
data.  
The minimum required time is as follows  
(approximate).  
*2  
This is the maximum recording speed of this  
recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed the  
value indicated in the above table even when  
using discs that support higher recording speeds.  
In addition, depending on the disc condition, the  
recorder may be unable to record at the  
maximum recording speed indicated in the table.  
High-speed dubbing is not available when  
dubbing titles recorded in SEP, SLP, or EP mode  
to DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.  
*3  
,continued  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b Notes  
To edit titles on the Dubbing List  
• The Dubbing List you created remains after  
dubbing. To edit the existing Dubbing List, select  
“Use Previous Dubbing List” in step 4. The  
Dubbing List is cleared when:  
1
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Dubbing Using  
The “Title Edit” display appears.  
– you change “Input Line System” setting in the  
“Basic” setup (page 130).  
– you reset the recorder (page 158).  
– you open the disc tray (except when dubbing  
from the HDD).  
– you edit the titles on a disc (except when  
dubbing from the HDD).  
– you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist  
(when dubbing from DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in  
VR mode only).  
– you finalise the disc.  
2
3
Select a title you want to edit, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
• The “seams” that are left over from editing may  
remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD+RWs/  
DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs  
(Video mode).  
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording  
starts, even if you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step  
9.  
Select an option, and press ENTER.  
The options differ depending on the  
dubbing direction or disc type.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected title.  
“Title Name”: Names or renames a title  
“A-B Erase”: Erases the section of the  
title (page 93).  
“Move”: Changes the order of titles  
“Preview”: Allows you to check the  
content of a title.  
“Divide”: Divides a title into two titles  
“Combine”: Combines two titles  
“Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters (page 95).  
“Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s  
thumbnail frame that appears in the Title  
List (page 39).  
“Recording Mode”: Sets the picture  
quality of the dubbing.  
“Bilingual”: Sets how a bilingual audio  
programme is dubbed.  
“Cancel”: Exits the sub-menu.  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit all of the  
titles.  
List” on page 100 to dub edited titles.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 Select “Yes” or “No,” and press  
ENTER.  
Making a Backup Disc  
(DVD Backup)  
To erase the backup data on the HDD,  
select “Yes.”  
To make another backup disc later, select  
“No.”  
+
RW  
-
+
-
RVideo  
RWVideo  
R
The recorder turns off automatically  
when you do not use the recorder for  
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing  
has finished.  
You can dub all of the contents on a finalised  
DVD+RW/DVD+R or finalised DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (Video mode) to another recordable  
DVD+RW/DVD-RW or unused DVD+R/  
DVD-R via the HDD as a backup copy.  
To display the dubbing information  
Press DISPLAY while dubbing.  
b Note  
Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made.  
To cancel DVD backup during dubbing  
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more  
than one second.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
To erase backup data on the HDD  
3 Select “DVD Backup,” and press  
1
Select “Erase back-up data” in step 4, and  
press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Start new DVD Backup,” and  
press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
2
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
• If you have previously dubbed backup  
data to the HDD, select “Resume  
writing data,” and go to step 7.  
b Notes  
• When dubbing to a DVD+R/DVD-R is stopped  
partway in step 8, you cannot play or record on  
the disc.  
5 Insert the DVD you are going to make  
a backup of.  
• You cannot make a backup disc of DVD+R DLs/  
DVD-R DLs.  
• You may not use the “DVD Backup” function  
depending on the recording quality or physical  
condition of the disc, or characteristics of the  
recording device and authoring software.  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts dubbing all of the  
contents on a DVD to the HDD.  
7 Press Z (open/close), and replace the  
DVD with a recordable DVD+RW/DVD-  
RW or an unused DVD+R/DVD-R.  
To make a backup disc of DVD+RWs/  
DVD+Rs, insert a recordable DVD+RW  
or unused DVD+R.  
To make a backup disc of DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs, insert a recordable DVD-RW  
or unused DVD-R.  
8 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts High-speed dubbing  
the contents that were dubbed to the  
HDD in step 6.  
9 Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.  
The disc is automatically finalised.  
• To make another backup disc, replace  
discs, select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
z Hint  
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after  
the initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) or HDD.  
DV Camcorder Dubbing  
Before DV Camcorder  
Dubbing  
b Notes  
• You cannot make a recording while DV  
camcorder dubbing.  
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not  
output signals.  
This section explains dubbing with a DV  
camcorder and playing the contents of a DV  
camcorder via the DV IN jack on the front  
panel. If you want to dub by way of the LINE  
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:  
– signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel  
or recorder operation cannot be performed  
correctly when using a digital video camera  
camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the  
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to  
the i.LINK standard.  
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do  
not connect a MICRO MV format digital video  
camera even if it has an i.LINK jack.  
– the images on the tape contain copy protection  
signals, which limit recording.  
• If you want to play DVDs dubbed from a DV  
camcorder on other DVD equipment, finalise the  
disc (page 45).  
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for DV  
camcorder dubbing,” and then move on to the  
section on dubbing. For more information  
How chapters are created  
• Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same  
colour system (page 130).  
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD  
become a single title. This title is divided into  
chapters. When dubbing to the HDD or a  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) and when  
“Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” in  
the “Recording” setup (page 143), each  
shooting session on the tape becomes a  
chapter on the disc. For other discs, the  
recorder divides the title into chapters  
according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” or  
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” setting in  
the “Recording” setup (page 143).  
Hookups  
DVD recorder  
to DV IN  
Preparing for DV camcorder  
dubbing  
i.LINK cable  
You can connect a digital video camera to the  
DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit  
from a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is  
straightforward because the recorder will fast  
forward and rewind the tape for you – you do  
not need to operate your digital video camera.  
Do the following to start using the “Manual  
Dubbing” functions of this recorder.  
See the instruction manual supplied with the  
digital video camera as well before  
(not supplied)  
DV output  
DV camcorder  
: Signal flow  
connecting.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b Notes  
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the  
recording destination.  
• You cannot connect more than one piece of  
digital video equipment to the recorder.  
• You cannot control the recorder using another  
device or another recorder of the same model.  
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of  
the cassette memory onto the disc.  
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.  
2 Insert the source DV/Digital8 format  
tape into your digital video camera.  
For the recorder to record or edit, your  
digital video camera must be set to video  
playback mode.  
• If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape that  
is recorded in multiple sound tracks, such as a  
tape with multiple sampling frequencies (48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or an unnatural  
sound will be output when playing back the  
sampling frequency switch point on the disc.  
• In order to use this recorder’s “Auto Chapter”  
setting (page 104), be sure to correctly set the  
clock on your digital video camera before  
shooting.  
3 Press REC MODE on the remote  
repeatedly to select the recording  
mode.  
The recording mode changes as follows:  
• The recorded picture may be momentarily  
affected or the start and end points of a title may  
be different from what you have set if the source  
DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the following  
conditions. In this case, see “Recording from  
For details about the recording mode, see  
page 71. Note that you cannot select  
manual recording mode.  
– There is a blank space in the recorded portion of  
the tape.  
– The tape’s time code is not sequential.  
– If the picture size or the recording mode on the  
tape being dubbed changes.  
• A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed  
when the recorder is set to a different colour  
system from the DV tape contents’ system. Set  
“Input Line System” in the “Basic” setup to the  
same colour system as the DV tape contents’  
system (page 130).  
4 Set the “External Audio” setting in the  
“Audio In” setup (page 138).  
5 Set the “DV Input” setting in the  
“Audio In” setup (page 138).  
You are ready to start dubbing. Select  
one of the dubbing methods on the  
following pages.  
To playback DV/Digital8 format tape  
You can check the contents of DV/Digital8  
format tape before dubbing. For details, see  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dubbing an Entire DV  
Format Tape (DV One  
Touch Dubbing)  
Dubbing Selected  
Scenes (Manual  
Dubbing)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
HDD  
-
-
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
RVR  
RVideo  
You can record the entire contents of a DV/  
Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single  
press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on  
the recorder. The recorder controls the digital  
video camera for the whole process, and  
completes the recording.  
You can select and dub scenes while playing  
a DV/Digital8 format tape.  
1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for DV  
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder.  
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts  
recording the tape contents.  
After the recording is finished, the recorder  
rewinds the tape in the digital video camera,  
and finalises the recorded disc (except DVD-  
RW/DVD-R (VR mode)) automatically.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Manual Dubbing,” and press  
ENTER.  
5 Select the recording destination,  
“Record to Hard Disk Drive” or  
“Record to DVD,” and press ENTER.  
6 Press H.  
The scene starts to play.  
To stop during recording  
Press x REC STOP more than 3 seconds.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
7 Find the point on the DV/Digital8  
format tape that you want to start  
dubbing from using m/M or c/  
C, and press X.  
z Hint  
You can also start DV One Touch Dubbing by  
selecting “One-Touch Dubbing” of “DV” in the  
System Menu.  
8 Select “Start Rec.,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts dubbing.  
9 Select “Pause Rec,” and press  
b Notes  
ENTER.  
• When a blank space between the recordings on  
the tape continues for more than two minutes, DV  
One Touch Dubbing ends automatically.  
• The recorder will pause recording when there is a  
blank space or an image containing copy  
protection signals on the tape. The recorder will  
resume recording automatically when receiving a  
recordable signal.  
The recorder pauses dubbing.  
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more  
scenes.  
11 Select “Stop Rec,” and press ENTER.  
The selected scenes are dubbed as a  
single title.  
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts  
(except for DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)).  
• DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically  
when there are images containing copy protection  
signals at the beginning of the tape.  
To cancel during “Manual Dubbing”  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
z Hint  
You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the  
DISPLAY button during dubbing. Press the  
DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing  
menu.  
Playing from a DV  
Camcorder  
b Note  
1 Connect your DV camcorder to the DV  
You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one  
second.  
IN jack on the front panel.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER.  
5 Start playback on the DV camcorder.  
Images from the DV camcorder appear  
on your TV screen.  
To cancel playback  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
z Hint  
You can dub the playing tape contents. During  
playback, press HDD or DVD to select the dubbing  
destination, and press z REC. To stop dubbing,  
press x REC STOP.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To lock the recorder (Child Lock)  
You can lock all of the buttons on the  
recorder so that the settings are not cancelled  
by mistake.  
Audio Tracks  
When the recorder is turned off, hold down x  
on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in  
the front panel display. The recorder does not  
work except for timer recordings while the  
Child Lock is set.  
Playing Audio Tracks  
from CD/DVD  
CD DATA DVD DATA CD  
You can play audio tracks on CDs, DATA  
DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs), or  
DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs).  
To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the  
recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the  
front panel display.  
Playback options  
CD DATA DVD DATA CD  
Buttons  
Operations  
AUDIO  
CLEAR  
AUDIO  
Selects stereo or monaural  
audio tracks recorded on the  
disc when pressed repeatedly  
in normal playback mode.  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
./>  
(previous/  
next)  
Goes to the next or previous  
track when pressed during  
playback.  
For MP3 discs, goes to the next  
or previous album when  
pressed repeatedly.  
ENTER  
.
>
M
x
m
H
X
m/M  
(fast  
Fast reverses/fast forwards the  
disc when pressed during  
PLAY  
MODE  
reverse/fast playback.  
forward)  
Search speed changes as  
follows:  
fast reverse fast forward  
mFR1 T t FF1  
mFR2 T T t t FF2  
1 Insert a disc.  
M
M
2 Press H.  
When you press and hold the  
button, fast forward/fast  
reverse continues at the  
selected speed untilyou release  
the button.  
Playback starts.  
To stop playback  
Press x (stop).  
To resume normal playback,  
press H.  
z Hint  
X (pause)  
Pauses playback.  
To resume normal playback,  
press H.  
You can play audio tracks using the Title List. Press  
TITLE LIST. Then select a track, and press  
ENTER.  
b Note  
When any video titles are recorded on a DATA  
DVD, the MP3 audio tracks on that DATA DVD  
cannot be played.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
b Note  
Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a  
CD  
“A-B Repeat” is not available for MP3 audio tracks.  
• When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive  
noise will be heard from the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/  
DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks.  
To avoid possible damage to the audio system,  
the user should take proper precautions when the  
LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT  
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are connected  
to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital  
Surround™ playback, an external DTS decoder  
must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of  
the recorder.  
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)  
CD DATA DVD DATA CD  
You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a  
single track on an album or disc.  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
• Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO  
button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD  
2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select an item to be repeated using M/  
m.  
“Repeat Disc”: repeats all of the tracks  
on a disc.  
“Repeat Album” (except for CD): repeats  
the current album.  
“Repeat Track”: repeats the current  
track.  
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current  
programme (page 110).  
Playing a specific portion  
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)  
CD  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press  
4 Press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
Repeat play starts.  
“Set point A” is selected.  
To cancel Repeat play  
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat  
Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
z Hint  
You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the  
System Menu.  
3 While monitoring the sound, press  
ENTER at the starting point (point A) of  
the portion to be played repeatedly.  
“Set point B” is selected.  
b Note  
You can select “Repeat Programme” only during  
Programme play.  
4 Continue playing to locate the ending  
point (point B), and press ENTER.  
A-B Repeat starts.  
To cancel A-B Repeat  
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off”  
in the “Play Mode” menu.  
z Hint  
You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in  
the System Menu.  
,continued  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To cancel Programme play  
Creating your own programme  
(Programme)  
Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set  
“Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play”  
in the “Play Mode” menu.  
CD DATA DVD DATA CD  
To erase the programme  
You can play the contents of an album or disc  
in the order you want by arranging the order  
of the albums/tracks on a disc to create your  
own programme. You can make a  
Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set  
“Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in  
the “Play Mode” menu.  
programme of up to 24 steps.  
z Hints  
• The programme you made remains after  
Programme play finishes. To play the same  
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start  
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
However, the programme is cleared after you  
remove the disc or press [/1.  
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to  
“Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select “Programme,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and  
press ENTER.  
• You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode”  
in the System Menu.  
The “Input/Edit Programme” display  
differs depending upon the disc type.  
Example: DATA DVD  
4 Select an album (example:  
01.BRAHMS) using M/m, and press  
,.  
5 Select a track (example:  
001.SYMPHONY01) using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The track is programmed.  
If you make a mistake, select the step  
number (example: 01-001) using </M/  
m, and press CLEAR.  
6 To programme other tracks, press </  
M/m/, to select a step number, and  
repeat steps 4 and 5.  
7 Press H.  
Programme play starts.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Press the number buttons to select the  
number of the album or track you  
want.  
Searching for an Audio  
Track  
If you make a mistake, select another  
number.  
CD DATA DVD DATA CD  
5 Press ENTER.  
The recorder starts playback from the  
selected number.  
You can search a disc by album or track. As  
albums and tracks are assigned individual  
numbers, select the album or track by  
entering its number.  
z Hint  
You can select an album or track using M/m in step  
4.  
Number  
buttons  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
PLAY  
MODE  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select a search method, and press  
ENTER.  
“Album Search” (except for CD)  
“Track Search”  
The display for entering the number  
appears.  
Example: Album Search  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About Jukebox  
Preparing for Using  
Jukebox  
There are two methods to use Jukebox:  
connecting the USB device or copying audio  
tracks to the HDD.  
When using Jukebox, you can do followings:  
• Store audio tracks on the HDD.  
• Play audio tracks using various play modes.  
• Label tracks or albums.  
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the  
recorder, or copy audio tracks from CDs/  
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected  
USB device to the HDD.  
• Assign albums a genre.  
• Change the track order.  
Notes on copying  
• You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to  
discs or USB devices.  
• Some audio tracks may not be copied depending  
on the file size.  
• You cannot copy audio tracks if the HDD is full  
or almost full.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
• An album name and MP3 audio track name are  
also copied. However, there may be some names  
that cannot be copied.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
• When copying is stopped partway, tracks finished  
copying before you stop will remain copied onto  
the HDD as an album. See the Album List to  
check which albums have been copied  
• When copying audio tracks from a CD, the album  
name is labelled as “F_***” and the audio track  
names are labelled as “T_***” automatically.  
• During copying, other operations cannot be  
performed.  
H
HDD/DVD  
DUB  
• While copying, timer recordings are unavailable.  
If the timer is set during copying, the recorder  
starts the timer recording after copying is  
finished.  
• Copy-protected CDs cannot be copied to the  
HDD.  
Connecting the USB device  
You can connect a USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder to listen to the MP3  
audio tracks or copy to the HDD. Refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with the USB  
device before connecting.  
DVD recorder  
to USB jack  
USB device  
b Note  
Some USB devices may not work with this  
recorder.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
7 Select “Copy Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
Copying audio tracks  
(DISC t HDD)  
The display asks for confirmation.  
8 Select “Yes” using </,, and press  
1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy  
to the HDD.  
ENTER.  
The selected album is copied to the HDD.  
• To copy more albums, go to step 5.  
2 Press H to start playback.  
3 Press HDD/DVD DUB.  
For CDs, all the tracks on the disc are  
copied to the HDD.  
To cancel copying  
Press ENTER.  
For DATA CDs/ DATA DVDs, the  
current album is copied to the HDD.  
To cancel copying  
Press ENTER.  
z Hint  
You can copy all the contents on the disc by  
selecting “DVD/CD -> HDD” in “Dubbing” in the  
System Menu.  
Copying an album  
(USB t HDD)  
You can copy up to 99 albums or 999 tracks  
on the USB device to the HDD.  
1 Connect the USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder (page 112).  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Listen to Music from USB  
Device,” and press ENTER.  
The Album List appears.  
5 Select an album, and press ,.  
6 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Select an album or track, and press  
ENTER.  
Playing Audio Tracks  
Using Jukebox/USB  
Device  
Playback starts from the selected album  
or track.  
To stop playback  
Press x (stop).  
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
Press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next)  
while the Album List is displayed. Each time  
you press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE  
(next), the entire Album List changes to the  
next/previous page of the album.  
CLEAR  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
To change the album order (Sort Titles)  
(HDD only)  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
1
2
3
Press < while the Album List is  
.
>
M
x
displayed.  
m
H
Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
X
Select the item using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Order  
Sorted  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
By number  
In order of album  
number.  
The System Menu appears.  
By favourite  
In order of playback  
times. The album that is  
most often played is listed  
at the top.  
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit” or  
“Listen to Music from USB Device,”  
and press ENTER.  
By album  
In alphabetical order.  
To listen to the audio tracks on the HDD,  
select “Listen to Music / Edit.”  
To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from  
the connected USB device, select “Listen  
to Music from USB Device.”  
To search for the album by genre (Genre)  
(HDD only)  
1
2
3
Press < while the Album List is  
displayed.  
The Album List appears.  
Select “Genre” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Select the genre using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The albums in the selected genre appear.  
To display all albums, select “All  
Genres.”  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To skip a track (Set Skip)  
If you want a track not to play, set the track to  
be skipped.  
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)  
You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a  
single track in the album.  
1
2
Select a track you want to skip.  
Press , while the Album List is  
displayed.  
1 Press , during playback.  
3
4
Select “Edit” using M/m, and press  
2 Select “Play Mode,” using M/m, and  
ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
Select “Set Skip” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.  
” appears next to the selected track.  
To cancel, select “Set Skip,” and press  
ENTER again.  
4 Select an item to be repeated using M/  
m.  
“Repeat Album”: repeats the current  
album.  
“Repeat Track”: repeats the current  
track.  
Playback options  
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current  
programme (page 116).  
Buttons  
Operations  
./>  
(previous/  
next)  
Goes to the next or previous  
track when pressed during  
playback.  
5 Press ENTER.  
Repeat play starts.  
m/M  
(fast  
Fast reverses/fast forwards the  
disc when pressed during  
To cancel Repeat play  
Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in the “Play  
Mode” menu.  
reverse/fast playback.  
forward)  
Search speed changes as  
follows:  
fast reverse fast forward  
T t  
T T t t  
b Notes  
m
M
• You can select “Repeat Programme” only during  
Programme play.  
m
M
When you press and hold the  
button, fast forward/fast  
reverse continues at the  
selected speed untilyou release  
the button.  
• “A-B Repeat” is not available when using “Music  
Jukebox.”  
To resume normal playback,  
press H.  
X (pause)  
Pauses playback.  
To resume normal playback,  
press H.  
,continued  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
To cancel Programme play  
Set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme  
Play” in the “Play Mode” menu during  
playback.  
Creating your own programme  
(Programme)  
You can play the contents of the HDD or  
connected USB device in the order you want  
by arranging the order of the tracks on the  
HDD or connected USB device to create your  
own programme. You can make a  
To erase the programme  
Set “Programme” to “Erase Programme List”  
in the “Play Mode” menu.  
z Hints  
programme of up to 24 steps.  
• You can select and play a track that is set to “Set  
Skip.”  
1 Press , while the Album List is  
• The programme you made remains after  
Programme play finishes. To play the same  
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start  
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
However, the programme is cleared after you  
press [/1.  
displayed.  
2 Select “Play Mode,” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to  
“Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu  
3 Select “Programme,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and  
press ENTER.  
5 Select an album (example: Album  
001) using M/m, and press ,.  
6 Select a track (example: Track 001)  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The track is programmed.  
If you make a mistake, select the step  
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,  
and press CLEAR.  
7 To programme other tracks, press </  
M/m/, to select a step number, and  
repeat steps 5 and 6.  
8 Press H.  
Programme play starts.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected album/track.  
Select “Yes” when asked for  
confirmation.  
Managing Audio Tracks  
on the Music Jukebox  
“Edit”: Allows you to make the  
following edits.  
You can erase or label albums/tracks on the  
HDD. You can also assign an album a genre.  
• “Album Name”: Allows you to enter or  
re-enter an album name (page 42).  
• “Track Name”: Allows you to enter or  
re-enter a track name (page 42).  
• “Set Genre”: Assigns an album a genre.  
• “Set Skip”: Sets a track to be skipped  
“Play Mode”: Selects play modes  
“Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a  
genre name (up to 12 characters)  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
b Note  
You cannot edit audio tracks on the connected USB  
device.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit,” and  
press ENTER.  
The Album List appears.  
4 Select an album or track, and press  
,.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Connecting the USB device  
JPEG Image Files  
You can connect a USB device (digital still  
camera, Memory card reader, and USB  
memory) to the USB jack on the recorder to  
view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD.  
Refer to the operating instructions supplied  
with the USB device before connecting.  
DVD recorder  
About the “Photo  
Album” Function  
The “Photo Album” function enables you to  
do following.  
• Store JPEG image files on the HDD.  
• View JPEG image files on the HDD, DATA  
DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs)/DATA CDs,  
or connected USB device.  
to USB jack  
• Edit JPEG image files.  
• Print JPEG image files.  
• Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs.  
USB cable (not supplied)  
USB output  
Preparing for Using the  
“Photo Album” Function  
Digital still camera  
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the  
recorder, or copy JPEG image files from  
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected  
USB device to the HDD.  
: Signal flow  
b Note  
Some USB devices may not work with this  
recorder.  
Copying JPEG image files to the  
HDD (DISC/USB t HDD)  
1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy  
to the HDD or connect the USB device  
to the USB jack on the recorder.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To copy from DATA CDs/DATA DVDs  
(DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs), select “View  
Photos on a CD/DVD.”  
Copying all JPEG image files  
from the connected USB device  
(USB t DVD-RW/DVD-R)  
To copy from the connected USB device,  
select “View Photos on a USB Device.”  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Example: CD/DVD  
1 Connect the USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder.  
2 Insert a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video  
mode).  
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
5 Select an album or JPEG image file  
using M/m, and press ,.  
5 Select “Copy Photos from a Digital  
Camera,” and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
6 Select an item, and press ENTER.  
To copy two or more albums or JPEG  
image files, select “Multi-Mode.”  
To copy all the albums and JPEG image  
files, select “Copy all to HDD,” and go to  
step 11.  
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
z Hint  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
To copy the album or file selected in step  
5 only, select “Copy to HDD,” and go to  
step 11.  
b Notes  
• During copying, other operations cannot be  
performed.  
7 Select an album or JPEG image file,  
• While copying JPEG image files, timer  
recordings are unavailable. If the timer is set  
during copying, the recorder starts the timer  
recording after copying is finished.  
and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, press , to  
select “Single-Mode” from the sub-  
menu.  
Copying JPEG image files or  
albums on the HDD  
(HDD y HDD)  
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the  
albums or JPEG image files you want  
to copy.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
9 Press ,.  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
10 Select “Copy to HDD,” and press  
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
ENTER.  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select an album using M/m.  
To copy the selected album, go to step 6.  
To copy a JPEG image file, go to step 5.  
,continued  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 Press ENTER, and select a JPEG  
Copying JPEG image albums to  
image file using M/m.  
a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)  
6 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
You can copy the edited JPEG image albums  
to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a  
video file. You can play the slideshow on  
other DVD equipment that may not be  
compatible with the playback of JPEG image  
files.  
7 Select an item, and press ENTER.  
To copy two or more albums or files,  
select “Multi-Mode.”  
To copy the selected album, select “Copy  
Album Contents” in “Album Options,”  
and go to step 12.  
To copy the selected files, select “Copy”  
in “File Options,” and go to step 12.  
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video  
mode).  
8 Select an album or JPEG image file,  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
and press ENTER.  
The System Menu appears.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, select  
“Single-Mode.”  
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the  
albums or JPEG image files you want  
to copy.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
5 Select an album using M/m, and press  
,.  
10 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
The sub-menu appears.  
6 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press  
11 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
12 Select the destination album using M/  
To copy the album selected in step 5  
only, go to step 10.  
m, and press ENTER.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
7 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
b Note  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the  
HDD in the following cases.  
– when the HDD disc space is insufficient for  
copying.  
– when there are already the maximum number of  
files and/or albums on the HDD.  
• To clear all check marks, select  
“Single-Mode.”  
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the  
albums you want to copy.  
9 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
10 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The selected JPEG image albums are  
copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the  
disc.  
4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
5 Select an album using M/m, and press  
The JPEG image album names are  
automatically labelled as “***ALBUM.”  
If you want to play the disc on other  
DVD equipment, finalise the disc  
ENTER.  
The photo list appears.  
6 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,  
and press ,.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
The sub-menu appears.  
7 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press  
z Hints  
ENTER.  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which  
albums have been copied (page 122).  
To copy the JPEG image file selected in  
step 6 only, go to step 11.  
8 Select a JPEG image file, and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
• You may not be able to play the slideshow  
depending on DVD equipment.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, select  
“Single-Mode.”  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a  
recordable DVD which has been recorded using  
other recorders/devices.  
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not  
be able to play on other equipment (page 45).  
• No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a  
disc.  
• When copying an album containing more than 99  
JPEG image files to a disc, slideshows will be  
created with every 99 JPEG image files and  
recorded to a disc.  
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the JPEG  
image files you want to copy.  
10 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
11 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press  
• For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not  
increase even if you erase slideshows.  
ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
12 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The selected JPEG image files are copied  
in the “PICTURE” folder on the disc.  
The JPEG image file names are  
automatically labelled as “PHOT****.”  
If you want to play the disc on other  
DVD equipment, finalise the disc  
Copying JPEG image files to a  
disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)  
You can copy the edited JPEG image files to  
a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a  
video file. You can play the slideshow on  
other DVD equipment that may not be  
compatible with the playback of JPEG image  
files.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
To select a JPEG image file from a  
different album  
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video  
mode).  
1
Switch to the album list in step 8.  
For instructions, see “To switch between  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
2
Select an album using M/m, and press  
<.  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
,continued  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
4
Switch to the JPEG image file list.  
Using the “Photo Album”  
List  
Select a JPEG image file using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
You can play JPEG image files on the HDD,  
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected  
USB device using the “Photo Album” list.  
z Hints  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which  
albums have been copied (page 122).  
b Notes  
• You may not be able to play the slideshow  
depending on DVD equipment.  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a  
recordable DVD which has been recorded using  
other recorders/devices.  
ANGLE  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not  
be able to play on other equipment (page 45).  
• No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a  
disc.  
• For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not  
increase even if you erase slideshows.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
O
.
>
x
H
X
ZOOM  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
3 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To play JPEG image files on the HDD,  
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.”  
To play JPEG image files on DATA  
CDs/DATA DVDs, select “View Photos  
on a CD/DVD.”  
To play JPEG image files from the  
connected USB device, select “View  
Photos on a USB Device.”  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
4 Select an album using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
To show the 4-Photo List or 1-Photo List,  
press < to select “Title View,” and  
press ENTER, then select “4 Photos” or  
“1 Photo” using M/m, and press ENTER.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12-Photo List (Example: HDD)  
C Sub-menu:  
Press , to display the sub-menu.  
The sub-menu displays options  
applicable only to the selected item. The  
displayed options differ depending upon  
the model, situation, and disc type.  
m
4-Photo List  
Sub-menu  
D Scroll bar:  
Appears when all of the JPEG image files  
do not fit on the list. To view the hidden  
JPEG image files, press M/m.  
E Album and JPEG image file  
information:  
Displays the image, JPEG image file  
number, recording date and time, JPEG  
image file name, and JPEG image file  
size.  
F Disc type and remaining space of  
m
current disc  
1-Photo List  
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
Press ./> while the “Photo Album”  
list is displayed. Each time you press ./  
>, the entire “Photo Album” list changes  
to the next/previous page of albums/JPEG  
image files.  
To switch between the album list and  
JPEG image file list  
1
2
3
Press < while the “Photo Album” list is  
A Album name  
displayed.  
B Album size  
Select “Display Mode” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Select “File” or “Album” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
To turn off the “Photo Album” list  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
,continued  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To reload the files or folders  
To play a slideshow with the sound (HDD  
only)  
You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to  
the sound stored in the HDD.  
When a disc or the connected USB device  
contains 1,000 or more files and/or 100 or  
more folders, select “Read next” in the  
“Photo Album” list, and press ENTER to  
view unloaded files or folders.  
1
Select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD”  
It may take a few minutes to load files or  
folders.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Switch between the album list and JPEG  
image file list, if necessary.  
b Note  
The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on  
the recorder is displayed as “ .”  
2
3
4
Select an album or JPEG image file using  
M/m, and press ,.  
Select “Start Audio Slideshow,” and  
press ENTER.  
Viewing a JPEG image file  
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the  
Select a genre using </,.  
For details about assigning a genre, see  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Switch to the album list, if necessary.  
5
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The slideshow and the playback from the  
first track of the selected genre start.  
2 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
The selected JPEG image file is  
displayed on the entire screen.  
b Notes  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may  
be displayed with black bands at top and bottom,  
or left and right.  
To display the detailed information  
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to  
display. This is not a malfunction.  
• All albums or tracks in the selected genre will be  
played during Slideshow even if some albums or  
tracks are set to skip.  
1
2
Select a JPEG image file, and press ,.  
Select “Detailed Information,” and press  
ENTER.  
The detailed information for the selected  
JPEG image file appears.  
To stop a slideshow  
Press x (stop) or O RETURN.  
Playing a slideshow  
To pause a slideshow  
Press X (pause).  
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the  
Note that only slideshow pauses and the  
sound continues to play.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Switch between the album list and JPEG  
image file list, if necessary.  
To view the next/previous image during a  
slideshow  
Press ./>.  
2 Select an album or JPEG image file  
using M/m, and press H.  
To zoom an image  
The slideshow starts.  
Press ZOOM repeatedly during a slideshow.  
Each time you press ZOOM, the  
magnification changes as shown below.  
t t normal magnification  
You can move the area you want to zoom  
using </M/m/,.  
If you press H while selecting a JPEG  
image file, the slideshow starts from the  
selected JPEG image file.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
To rotate an image  
Press ANGLE repeatedly during a slideshow.  
Each time you press ANGLE, the image turns  
clockwise by 90°.  
Managing JPEG Image  
Files on the HDD  
z Hint  
You can start a slideshow by selecting “Start  
Slideshow” from the sub-menu.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
4 Select an album or JPEG image file,  
and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can make the following edits to the  
album/JPEG image file.  
“Start Slideshow”: Starts a slideshow  
“Start Audio Slideshow” (HDD only):  
Starts a slideshow with the sound  
“New Album”: Creates a new album.  
“Album Options”  
• “Erase Album”: Erases the selected  
album.  
• “Copy Album Contents”: Copies all  
JPEG image files in the selected album  
to the HDD (page 119).  
,continued  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• “Rename Album”: Changes the  
selected album name (page 42).  
• “Protect Album Contents”: Protects all  
JPEG image files in the selected album.  
• “Cancel Protection”: Cancels  
protection of all JPEG image files in the  
selected album.  
Printing JPEG Image  
Files  
You can print JPEG image files on the HDD,  
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected  
USB device by connecting a PictBridge-  
compatible printer to the USB jack on the  
recorder.  
“Copy to DVD”: Copies the selected  
album or JPEG image file to a DVD  
“Multi-Mode”: Selects multiple albums  
or JPEG image files to edit.  
“Copy all to HDD”: Copies all the  
albums and JPEG image files to the HDD  
Refer to the instructions supplied with the  
printer.  
“Copy to HDD”: Copies the selected  
album or JPEG image file to the HDD  
“File Options”  
• “Erase”: Erases the selected JPEG  
image file.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
• “Copy”: Copies the selected JPEG  
image file (page 119).  
• “Rename File”: Changes the selected  
JPEG image file name (page 42).  
• “Protect”: Protects the selected JPEG  
image file. Select again to cancel the  
protection.  
“Print”: Prints the selected JPEG image  
file (page 126).  
“Detailed Information”: Displays the  
detailed information for the selected  
JPEG image file (page 124).  
1 Connect a PictBridge-compatible  
printer to the USB jack on the  
recorder.  
“Single-Mode”: Cancels “Multi-Mode.”  
DVD recorder  
to USB jack  
PictBridge-compatible  
printer  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2 Connect the USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder.  
12 Select “Print,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
When printing JPEG image files on the  
HDD, skip this step.  
13 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
You can set the paper size and layout.  
Refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the printer.  
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
To cancel printing  
Press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
5 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To print JPEG image files on the HDD,  
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.”  
To print JPEG image files on a DATA  
DVD/DATA CD, select “View Photos  
on a CD/DVD.”  
To display the connected printer  
Select “Confirm Printer” of “USB” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 150).  
To restart the connected USB device  
Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 150).  
To print JPEG image files from the  
connected USB device, select “View  
Photos on a USB Device.”  
z Hint  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Printing options, such as paper size or layout, differ  
depending on the printer. For details, refer to the  
instructions supplied with the printer.  
6 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
7 Select a file using M/m, and press  
,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
8 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To print two or more files, select “Multi-  
Mode.”  
To print the file selected in step 7 only,  
go to step 12.  
9 Select a file, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, select  
“Single-Mode.”  
10 Repeat step 9 to select all files you  
want to print.  
11 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finalise  
Finalises a disc to play it on other DVD  
equipment.  
Settings and Adjustments  
For details, see page 45.  
Disc Settings (Disc  
Setup)  
Optimise HDD  
As you record, erase and edit recordings  
repeatedly, the HDD file system gradually  
becomes fragmented. To ‘clean up’ all the  
fragmented files, optimise the HDD  
periodically. When the HDD needs  
optimising, a message recommending  
optimisation will appear automatically.  
The “Disc Setup” setup allows you to adjust  
DVD related settings.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
1
2
Select “Optimise HDD” in “Disc Setup,”  
and press ENTER.  
2 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
A progress bar appears and the  
optimisation starts.  
The “Disc Setup” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
To cancel optimisation, press ENTER.  
The HDD will be partly optimised.  
b Notes  
• It will take about eight hours to optimise the  
HDD. During optimisation, other operations,  
such as recording or playback, cannot be  
performed.  
• You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD  
disc space is insufficient for optimising. Erase  
titles to open up disc space (page 92).  
Basic  
Format HDD.  
You can format the HDD and resolve the  
problem when the hard disk error occurred.  
“Format HDD.” can be selected only when  
the hard disk needs formatting. Note that all  
of the recorded content on the HDD will be  
erased.  
Input Disc Name  
You can label a disc.  
For details, see page 43.  
Protect Disc  
You can protect a disc against erasure.  
For details, see page 44.  
1
Select “Format HDD.” in “Disc Setup,”  
and press ENTER.  
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)  
The recorder automatically starts formatting  
in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is  
selected below, when a new, unformatted  
DVD-RW is inserted.  
2
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
VR Mode  
Automatically formats the disc  
in VR mode.  
Video  
Mode  
Automatically formats the disc  
in Video mode.  
Format  
You can manually re-format a DVD+RW,  
DVD-RW, or DVD-R disc to make a blank  
disc.  
For details, see page 47.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3
4
Press </, repeatedly until the  
programme position of the station that  
carries a time signal appears.  
Recorder Settings  
(Basic)  
Press m to select “Start,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Basic” setup helps you to make clock  
and other recorder related settings.  
• If the recorder does not receive a time  
signal from any station, press  
O RETURN and set the clock  
manually.  
• If the Auto Clock Set function did not  
set the clock correctly for your local  
area, try another station for the Auto  
Clock Set function or set the clock  
manually.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
The “Basic” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
Manual (Manual Clock Set)  
Set the clock manually.  
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM  
MENU.  
1
2
Select “Clock Setting” in “Basic,” and  
press ENTER.  
Select “Manual,” and press ENTER.  
3
4
Press </, to select the time zone for  
Clock Setting  
your area, and press m.  
The recorder will automatically set the clock  
when any digital channels have been scanned  
and stored.  
Select “On” if you are now on summer  
time, and press ENTER.  
Auto (Auto Clock Set)  
Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a  
programme position in your local area  
broadcasts a time signal.  
1
2
Select “Clock Setting” in “Basic,” and  
press ENTER.  
Select “Auto,” and press ENTER.  
,continued  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5
6
Press M/m to set the day, and press ,.  
Set the month, year, hour, and minutes in  
sequence. Press </, to select the item  
to be set, then press M/m to set the  
numbers. The day of the week is set  
automatically.  
HELP Setting  
On  
Displays Help information for  
GUI displays.  
Off  
Does not set to HELP setting  
mode.  
To change the numbers, press < to  
return to the item to be changed, and  
press M/m.  
EPG Type Select  
Selects the EPG (Electronic Programme  
Guide) type to use.  
Press ENTER to start the clock.  
GUIDE  
Plus+  
Select this to use the Gemstar  
GUIDE Plus+ electronic  
programme guide (page 63).  
Input Line System  
Selects the colour system when recording  
from the connected equipment.  
Guide  
(Digital)  
Select this to use the digital  
electronic programme guide  
NTSC  
Records in NTSC or PAL-60  
colour system.  
PAL/  
SECAM  
Records in PAL or SECAM  
colour system.  
Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder)  
Select this to run the “Easy Setup”  
programme.  
b Notes  
1
Select “Easy Setup” in “Basic,” and press  
ENTER.  
• When picture noise appears after you change the  
“Input Line System” setting, change the “Input  
Colour System” setting (page 136). If picture  
noise still appears, hold down x (stop) on the  
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder.  
• When you change the “Input Line System”  
setting, the Dubbing List is erased.  
2
3
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
Follow the instructions for “Easy Setup”  
(page 26) from step 2.  
Power Save  
Selects whether this recorder is in power save  
mode when the power is turned off (standby).  
Mode 1  
Only antenna input signals are  
output to the connected TV  
when the recorder is in standby.  
Mode 2  
Off  
No input signals are output  
when the recorder is in standby.  
Does not set to power save  
mode. Normally, select this  
setting.  
b Note  
Power Save mode does not function in the  
following cases, even when “Power Save” is set to  
“Mode 1” or “Mode 2.”  
– There is a timer setting with “VPS / PDC” in the  
SCHEDULE list.  
– The SMARTLINK features are not available  
when “Power Save” is set to “Mode 1” or “Mode  
2.”  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Add New Channels  
Aerial Reception  
Settings (Digital Tuner)  
Scans digital channels and adds found  
channels to the channel list.  
1
2
Select “Add New Channels” in “Digital  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
The “Digital Tuner” setup helps you to make  
digital tuner and programme position settings  
for the recorder.  
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder scans channels and stores  
them.  
To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM  
MENU or EXIT.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
Channel Sort  
3 Select “Digital Tuner,” and press  
ENTER.  
After the programme positions have been set,  
you can change the order of each programme  
position in the displayed list.  
The “Digital Tuner” setup display  
appears with the following options. The  
default settings are underlined.  
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM  
MENU.  
1
2
Select “Channel Sort” in “Digital  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
3
4
Press M/m to select a programme  
position you want to move, and press  
ENTER.  
• To display other pages, press M/m  
repeatedly.  
Replace Channels  
Scans available digital channels, and replaces  
all the channels already stored in the channel  
list with the scanned results.  
Press M/m to select the programme  
position number to swap for the one  
selected in step 3, and press ENTER.  
The programme position numbers are  
swapped.  
1
Select “Replace Channels” in “Digital  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
2
3
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
Select your country/region using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
• To move other programme positions,  
repeat from step 3.  
The recorder scans available digital  
channels and stores them.  
To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM  
MENU or EXIT.  
If any programme positions are unused  
or contain unwanted channels, you can  
disable them (page 132).  
b Note  
The timer settings for the replaced channels are  
deleted.  
,continued  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Channel Options  
Signal Check  
You can skip or lock certain channels.  
You can check the signal strength and quality  
of the channel.  
1
Select “Channel Options” in “Digital  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
1
2
Select “Signal Check” in “Digital  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
2
3
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
To set a password, see page 145.  
To check the signal strength and quality  
of other channels, select a channel using  
</,.  
4
5
Select the programme position you want  
to skip or lock using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
D.TV Language  
Select an option, and press ENTER.  
• To skip the programme position, select  
.
• To lock the programme position, select  
.
Selects main and sub audio/subtitle  
languages or teletext language for bilingual  
programmes.  
1
2
Select “D.TV Language” in “Digital  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected programme position.  
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
Auto Skip  
Selects whether to skip radio or data  
channels.  
Off  
No channels are skipped.  
Radio channels are skipped.  
Data channels are skipped.  
Radio  
Data  
3
4
Select an item using M/m.  
Select a language using </,.  
Radio &  
Data  
Radio and data channels are  
skipped when selecting  
channels.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Download from TV  
If you connect a TV to this recorder with  
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme  
positions by downloading from your TV.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with your TV.  
Aerial Reception  
Settings (Analog Tuner)  
The “Analog Tuner” setup helps you to make  
analogue tuner and programme position  
settings for the recorder.  
1
Select “Download from TV,” and press  
ENTER.  
2
Select your country/region using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
The tuner preset data will be downloaded  
from your TV to this recorder.  
If any programme positions are unused  
or contain unwanted channels, you can  
disable them (page 134).  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Analog Tuner,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Analog Tuner” setup appears with  
the following options. The default  
settings are underlined.  
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM  
MENU.  
Manual CH Setting  
Presets programme positions manually.  
If some programme positions could not be set  
using the “Easy Setup” function, you can set  
them manually.  
If there is no sound or if the picture is  
distorted, the wrong tuner system may have  
been preset during “Easy Setup.” Set the  
correct tuner system manually in the steps  
below.  
1
Select “Manual CH Setting” in “Analog  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
2
3
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
Auto Channel Setting  
Select your country/region using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
Auto Scan  
Programme position  
If you connect a TV to this recorder not using  
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme  
positions automatically using “Auto Scan.”  
1
Select “Auto Channel Setting” in  
“Analog Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
2
3
Select “Auto Scan,” and press ENTER.  
Select your country/region using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
The programme position order will be set  
according to the country/region you set.  
If any programme positions are unused  
or contain unwanted channels, you can  
disable them (page 134).  
4
5
Press ./> to select the programme  
position.  
Select the item you want to change using  
M/m, and change the settings using </  
,, then press ENTER.  
• To preset another programme position,  
repeat from step 4.  
,continued  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Skip  
Sound System  
Select an available TV system (page 135).  
On  
Select this when the  
programme position is unused  
or contains unwanted channels.  
The selected position will be  
skipped when you press PROG  
+/–.  
B/G  
Select this when in West  
European countries, except  
those listed in “Receivable  
D/K  
I
Select this when in East  
European countries.  
Off  
Does not skip the selected  
programme position.  
Select this when in Great  
Britain/Ireland.  
CH System  
Select the region to get the best broadcast  
reception.  
L
Select this when in France.  
FR  
Select this when in France.  
Name  
Changes or enters a new station name (up to  
5 characters). The recorder must receive  
programme position information (e.g.,  
SMARTLINK information) for station  
names to appear automatically.  
Press ,, then press </, repeatedly to  
select a character.  
To change the characters, press M/m to move  
the cursor, and press </,.  
Western  
Euro  
Select this when in West  
European countries.  
UK & IE  
Select this when in Great  
Britain/Ireland.  
Eastern  
Euro  
Select this when in East  
European countries.  
AFT  
Decoder  
On  
Turns on the Auto Fine Tuning  
function.  
Normally select this position.  
Sets the external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal  
Plus analogue decoder) channels.  
For details, see page 34.  
Off  
Allows you to adjust the  
picture manually.  
Channel  
Press </, repeatedly until the programme  
position you want is displayed.  
• To select a cable or satellite programme  
position, press </, until the programme  
position you want is displayed.  
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not  
work effectively, select “Off” and press m.  
Press </, to obtain a clearer picture, and  
press ENTER.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Receivable channels  
Channel Swapping  
TV system  
Channel coverage  
After the programme positions have been set,  
you can change the order of each programme  
position in the display list.  
BG (West European E2 – E12 VHF  
Countries, except  
Italia A – H VHF  
those listed below)  
E21 – E69 UHF  
1
Select “Channel Swapping” in “Analog  
Tuner,” and press ENTER.  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
2
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
S01 – S05 CATV  
DK (East European R1 – R12 VHF  
Countries)  
R21 – R69 UHF  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
I (Great Britain/  
Ireland)  
Ireland A – J VHF  
3
4
Press M/m to select the programme  
position number you want to swap, and  
press ,.  
• To display other pages, press ./  
> repeatedly.  
South Africa 4 – 11, 13  
VHF  
B21 – B69 UHF  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
F2 – F10 VHF  
Press M/m to select the programme  
position number to swap for the one  
selected in step 3, and press ENTER.  
The programme position numbers are  
swapped.  
L* (France)  
F21 – F69 UHF  
B – Q CATV  
• To swap the programme position  
number of another station, repeat from  
step 3.  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
* To receive broadcasts in France, select “L.”  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
z Hint  
When “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC,” you  
can select “Auto,” “3.58NTSC,” or “PAL-60.”  
Video Settings (Video In/  
Out)  
b Note  
“Input Colour System” cannot be set when viewing  
digital broadcasts.  
The “Video In/Out” settings will adjust items  
related to the image, such as size and colour.  
Select the settings according to the type of  
TV, tuner, or decoder connected to the DVD  
recorder.  
Component Video Out  
Selects the signal format in which the  
recorder outputs video signals: interlace or  
progressive, from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
Normal(Inter- Outputs signals in the  
lace)  
interlace format.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
Progressive  
Outputs signals in the  
progressive format. Select  
this when you want to view  
progressive signals.  
3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Video In/Out” setup appears with  
the following options. The default  
settings are underlined.  
b Notes  
• When you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” you  
cannot set “Component Video Out.”  
• When you connect the recorder to a monitor or  
projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT jacks, do not set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB.” If  
you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” in this case, the  
picture may not appear.  
• When picture noise appears after you set the  
recorder to progressive format, hold down x  
(stop) on the recorder, and press Z (open/close)  
on the recorder.  
• No video signals are output when using the  
HDMI connection.  
Input Colour System  
Selects the colour system when picture noise  
appears after you change the “Input Line  
System” setting (page 130).  
LINE 3 Out  
Selects a method of outputting video signals  
for the LINE 3 – TV jack.  
Auto  
Recorder automatically  
detects signals of colour  
systems and selects the  
appropriate colour system.  
Video  
S-Video  
RGB  
Outputs video signals.  
Outputs S-video signals.  
Outputs RGB signals.  
PAL  
Selects the PAL colour  
system when “Input Line  
System” is set to “PAL/  
SECAM.”  
b Notes  
• If your TV does not accept S-video or RGB  
signals, the image will not be displayed in the  
selected method on the TV screen even if you  
select “S-Video” or “RGB.” See the instructions  
supplied with your TV.  
SECAM  
Selects the SECAM colour  
system when “Input Line  
System” is set to “PAL/  
SECAM.”  
• SMARTLINK is available only when “Video” is  
selected.  
• RGB signals are not output when using the HDMI  
connection.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
LINE 1 In  
Selects a method of inputting video signals  
for the LINE 1/DECODER jack. The picture  
will not be clear if this setting does not match  
the type of video input signal.  
Audio Input Settings  
(Audio In)  
The “Audio In” setup allows you to adjust the  
sound according to the playback and  
connection conditions.  
Video  
Inputs video signals.  
Inputs S-video signals.  
Inputs RGB signals.  
S-Video  
RGB  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
Decoder  
Select this when connecting  
to an external decoder  
(PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue decoder). If you  
connect to a cable box/  
satellite receiver such as  
CanalSat, do not select this  
option.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Audio In,” and press ENTER.  
The “Audio In” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
NTSC on PAL TV  
Sets the recorder to convert signals of the  
NTSC colour system to the PAL colour  
system to play NTSC discs on PAL-only  
TVs. Refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with your TV.  
On  
Plays NTSC discs on PAL-  
only TVs.  
Off  
Select this if the connected  
TV is a multi-system  
NICAM Select (page 72)  
NICAM  
Normally select this  
position.  
(NTSC-compatible) TV.  
Standard  
Select this if the sound from  
NICAM broadcasts is not  
clear.  
Analog Tuner Level  
If the playback sound is distorted, set this  
item to “Compression.” The recorder reduces  
the audio output level.  
This function affects the output of the  
following jacks:  
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks  
– LINE 3 – TV jack  
– LINE 1/DECODER jack  
Normal  
Normally select this  
position.  
Compression Select this when the  
playback sound from the  
speakers is distorted.  
,continued  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
External Audio  
Audio Output Settings  
(Audio Out)  
Stereo  
Select this when receiving  
stereo programmes from  
connected equipment.  
Bilingual  
Select this when receiving  
bilingual programmes  
from connected  
The “Audio Out” setup allows you to switch  
the method of outputting audio signals when  
you connect a component such as an  
amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack.  
If you connect a component that does not  
accept the selected audio signal, a loud noise  
(or no sound) will come from the speakers,  
and may affect your ears or cause speaker  
damage.  
equipment.  
b Note  
When receiving audio input signals from the DV  
input jack, the recorder automatically selects  
“Stereo” or “Bilingual” regardless of the “External  
Audio” setting.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
Bilingual Recording  
Selects the sound to be recorded.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
A/L  
Records the main sound  
for the bilingual  
programme.  
3 Select “Audio Out,” and press ENTER.  
The “Audio Out” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
B/R  
Records the sub sound for  
the bilingual programme.  
b Note  
When recording a bilingual audio signal to the  
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to  
“Video Mode Off” (page 144) (except in PCM  
mode)) or a DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode (except  
in PCM mode), both audio channels are recorded  
and you can select the sound when playing.  
DV Input  
Select the setting for the audio input when  
DV camcorder dubbing.  
Dolby Digital Output (HDD/DVDs only)  
Select “Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)”/“Mix (Stereo  
1: 50 %)”/“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” or “Stereo  
2” only if you have added a second audio  
when recording with your digital video  
camera.  
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.  
Dolby Digital Select this when the  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component with a  
built-in Dolby Digital  
decoder.  
Stereo 1  
Records original  
sound only.  
Normally select this  
when dubbing a DV  
format tape.  
Dolby Digital Select this when the  
-> PCM  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component lacking a  
built-in Dolby Digital  
decoder.  
Stereo 2  
Records additional  
audio only.  
b Note  
Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)  
Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)  
Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with Dolby Digital signals, the  
PCM signals will be automatically output even  
when you select “Dolby Digital.”  
Records both stereo  
1 and 2.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
DTS Output (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.  
MPEG Output (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.  
On  
Select this when the  
MPEG  
Select this when the  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component with a  
built-in DTS decoder.  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component with a  
built-in MPEG decoder.  
Off  
Select this when the  
MPEG ->  
PCM  
Select this when the  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component without a  
built-in DTS decoder.  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component without a  
built-in MPEG decoder. If  
you play MPEG audio  
sound tracks, the recorder  
outputs stereo signals via  
the DIGITAL OUT  
b Note  
When HDMI output is performed to equipment not  
compatible with DTS signals, the signals will not be  
output regardless of the “DTS Output” setting.  
(COAXIAL) jack.  
b Note  
96 kHz PCM Output (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects the sampling frequency of the audio  
signal.  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the PCM  
signals will be automatically output even when you  
select “MPEG.”  
96 kHz ->  
48 kHz  
The audio signals of DVD  
VIDEOs are converted to  
48 kHz and output.  
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control)  
(DVDs only)  
Selects the dynamic range (difference  
between soft and loud sounds) setting when  
playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio  
DRC.” This affects the output from the  
following jacks:  
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks  
– LINE 3 – TV jack  
– LINE 1/DECODER jack  
96 kHz  
All signals containing  
96 kHz are output without  
conversion. However, the  
signals are output at 48 kHz  
if copyright-protected  
signals are contained.  
b Notes  
• “96 kHz PCM Output” setting has no effect when  
audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT  
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks or LINE 3 – TV/LINE 1/  
DECODER jack. If the sampling frequency is  
96 kHz, signals are simply converted to analogue  
signals and output.  
– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT  
jack only when “Dolby Digital Output” is  
set to “Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 138).  
On  
Makes low sounds clear  
even if you turn the volume  
down.  
• If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with 96 kHz signals, 48 kHz PCM  
will be automatically output even when you select  
“96 kHz.”  
Off  
Normally select this  
position.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Auto Language  
The “Auto Language” function is available  
when “Audio Language” and “Subtitle  
Language” are set to the same language, and  
“Subtitle Display” is set to “On.”  
Language Settings  
(Language)  
The “Language” setup allows you to adjust  
language settings.  
On  
For DVD VIDEOs whose  
main audio track is the  
language you set in “Audio  
Language” and “Subtitle  
Language,” the recorder  
plays the main audio track  
without subtitles.  
For DVD VIDEOs whose  
main audio track is not the  
language you set in “Audio  
Language” and “Subtitle  
Language,” the recorder  
plays the main audio track  
with subtitles in the  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Language,” and press ENTER.  
The “Language” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
language you set.  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
DVD Menu Language (DVD VIDEO only)  
Switches the language for the DVD menu.  
Select “w/Subtitle Language” to set the same  
language as the language you set in “Subtitle  
Language.”  
OSD Language  
Switches the display language on the screen.  
Subtitle Display  
On  
Off  
Displays subtitles.  
Audio Language (DVD VIDEO only)  
Switches the language of the sound track.  
Does not display subtitles.  
Assist Subtitle Displays special assistive  
Subtitle Language (DVD VIDEO only)  
Switches the language of the subtitles  
recorded on the disc.  
subtitles, where available.  
z Hint  
If you select “Others” in “Audio Language,”  
“Subtitle Language,” or “DVD Menu Language,”  
press m, and enter a language code from “Language  
b Note  
If you select a language in “DVD Menu Language,”  
“Subtitle Language,” or “Audio Language” that is  
not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of the  
recorded languages will be automatically selected.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Manual recording mode  
The table below shows the approximate  
recording times for the HDD and the different  
DVD types in each manual recording mode,  
as well as the standard recording mode  
equivalents.  
Recording Settings  
(Recording)  
The “Recording” setup allows you to adjust  
recording settings.  
The recording time for the HDD  
Approx. recording time (hours)  
Recording  
mode  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
HXD770 HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070  
*1  
*2  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
HQ+  
17  
25  
23  
34  
34  
36  
53  
53  
73  
PCM  
105  
105  
3 Select “Recording,” and press  
MN32 25  
(HQ)  
ENTER.  
The “Recording” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
MN31 27  
MN30 29  
MN29 31  
MN28 33  
MN27 36  
36  
39  
42  
45  
48  
50  
57  
61  
66  
70  
75  
79  
115  
120  
130  
140  
150  
155  
MN26 37  
(HSP)  
MN25 39  
MN24 42  
MN23 44  
MN22 46  
53  
56  
59  
62  
68  
84  
88  
92  
97  
105  
165  
175  
185  
195  
210  
Manual Rec. Mode  
MN21 51  
(SP)  
On (go to  
setup)  
Allows you to select all  
recording modes.  
Select this, and press  
ENTER.  
MN20 54  
MN19 59  
73  
79  
84  
115  
120  
130  
230  
245  
265  
Then, select a recording  
mode using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
MN18 63  
(LSP)  
Off  
Allows you to select  
standard recording modes  
only.  
MN17 67  
MN16 72  
90  
140  
150  
155  
280  
300  
315  
96  
MN15 75  
(ESP)  
100  
MN14 78  
MN13 82  
MN12 86  
MN11 90  
MN10 93  
105  
110  
115  
120  
125  
135  
165  
175  
185  
190  
200  
210  
335  
350  
370  
390  
405  
420  
MN9  
(LP)  
100  
MN8  
110  
150  
235  
475  
,continued  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Approx. recording time (hours)  
Approx. recording time  
(hours)  
Recording  
mode  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
Recording  
mode  
HXD770 HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070  
DVD+RW/  
DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/  
MN7  
120  
150  
165  
200  
265  
315  
530  
635  
DVD+R/  
DVD-R  
DVD-R DL  
MN6  
(EP)  
MN12  
MN11  
MN10  
MN9 (LP)  
MN8  
3 hr. 30 min. 6 hr. 17 min.  
3 hr. 40 min. 6 hr. 35 min.  
3 hr. 50 min. 6 hr. 53 min.  
MN5  
175  
200  
235  
270  
370  
425  
745  
850  
MN4  
(SLP)  
4
7 hr. 11 min.  
MN3  
(SEP)  
255  
340  
530  
1060  
4 hr. 30 min. 8 hr. 4 min.  
MN2  
MN1  
300  
340  
405  
455  
635  
710  
1275  
1420  
MN7  
5
6
7
8
8 hr. 58 min.  
10 hr. 46 min.  
12 hr. 34 min.  
14 hr. 21 min.  
17 hr. 57 min.  
21 hr. 32 min.  
24  
*3  
MN6 (EP)  
*3  
MN5  
The recording time for DVDs  
*3  
MN4 (SLP)  
Approx. recording time  
(hours)  
*3*4  
*4  
MN3  
MN2  
MN1  
(SEP ) 10  
12  
*3*4  
*3*4  
Recording  
mode  
DVD+RW/  
DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/  
DVD+R/  
DVD-R  
13 hr.  
22 min.  
DVD-R DL  
*1  
Records in higher quality (15 Mbps).  
*2  
PCM  
1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min.  
1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min.  
1 hr. 5 min. 1 hr. 57 min.  
1 hr. 10 min. 2 hr. 6 min.  
1 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 15 min.  
1 hr. 20 min. 2 hr. 24 min.  
1 hr. 25 min. 2 hr. 33 min.  
1 hr. 30 min. 2 hr. 41 min.  
1 hr. 35 min. 2 hr. 50 min.  
1 hr. 40 min. 2 hr. 59 min.  
1 hr. 45 min. 3 hr. 8 min.  
1 hr. 50 min. 3 hr. 17 min.  
HQ+ mode is not available for DVDs. When  
recording to DVDs, the recording mode  
automatically switches to HQ mode even if you  
set to HQ+ mode.  
MN32 (HQ)  
MN31  
*2  
Audio signals are recorded in 48kHz PCM  
format, and video signals are recorded in HQ  
mode. When recording a bilingual programme,  
select the sound to be recorded (page 138).  
Titles recorded in MN6 or lower mode cannot be  
dubbed to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs at high speed.  
SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode is not available  
for DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R DLs. When  
recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the  
recording mode automatically switches to SLP  
mode even if you set to SEP, MN1, MN2, or  
MN3 mode.  
MN30  
MN29  
MN28  
*3  
*4  
MN27  
MN26 (HSP)  
MN25  
MN24  
MN23  
MN22  
z Hint  
Audio signals are recorded in Dolby Digital 2 ch  
format (except for PCM mode).  
MN21 (SP)  
MN20  
2
3 hr. 35 min.  
2 hr. 10 min. 3 hr. 53 min.  
2 hr. 20 min. 4 hr. 11 min.  
2 hr. 30 min. 4 hr. 29 min.  
2 hr. 40 min. 4 hr. 47 min.  
2 hr. 50 min. 5 hr. 5 min.  
MN19  
MN18 (LSP)  
MN17  
MN16  
MN15 (ESP)  
MN14  
3
5 hr. 23 min.  
3 hr. 10 min. 5 hr. 41 min.  
3 hr. 20 min. 5 hr. 59 min.  
MN13  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) (HDD/DVD-RW/  
DVD-R in VR mode only)  
The first figure refers to when “Input Line  
System” is set to “NTSC”; the second when  
set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup  
On  
The recorder detects  
changes in the picture and  
sound and automatically  
inserts chapter marks (up to  
99 chapters for one title  
recorded on the HDD).  
For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set  
to “Video Mode Off”)/DVD-RW (VR mode)/  
DVD-R (VR mode)  
HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN16: 720 × 480 / 720  
× 576  
Off  
No chapter mark is inserted.  
MN15 to MN12: 544 × 480 / 544 × 576  
MN11 to MN9: 480 × 480 / 544 × 576  
MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576  
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288  
b Notes  
• The actual chapter mark interval may vary  
depending on the amount of information  
contained in the video to be recorded.  
For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set  
to “Video Mode On”)/DVD+RW/DVD-RW  
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)  
HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN9: 720 × 480 / 720  
× 576  
• Chapter marks are automatically inserted, where  
the date or time information changes on the tape,  
when “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On”  
during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (VR mode).  
MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576  
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288  
Auto Chapter (Video) (DVD-RW/DVD-R in  
Video mode only)  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
No  
No chapter mark is inserted.  
On  
Automatically adjusts the  
recording mode to enable  
the entire programme to be  
recorded (page 74).  
Separation  
10 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 10-minute  
intervals.  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
15 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 15-minute  
intervals.  
Subtitle Recording  
On  
Records digital broadcast  
subtitles.  
Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) (DVD+RW/  
DVD+R only)  
Off  
No digital broadcast  
subtitles are recorded.  
No  
No chapter mark is inserted.  
Separation  
Set Thumbnail  
Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture  
shown in the Title List.  
10 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 10-minute  
intervals.  
0 seconds  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
The first frame of the title is  
set for the thumbnail  
picture.  
15 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 15-minute  
intervals.  
The frame at 30 seconds  
from the first frame is set for  
the thumbnail picture.  
The frame at 3 minutes from  
the first frame is set for the  
thumbnail picture.  
,continued  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
HDD Recording Format  
Selects the HDD recording format.  
Playback Settings  
(Playback)  
Video Mode  
Off  
Records to the HDD in VR  
mode.  
When recording stereo and  
bilingual programmes, both  
main and sub sounds can be  
recorded.  
The “Playback” setup allows you to adjust  
the playback settings.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
Video Mode  
On  
Records to the HDD in  
Video mode.  
When recording stereo and  
bilingual programmes, only  
one sound track (main or  
sub) can be recorded.  
Set “Bilingual Recording”  
to “A/L” (default) or “B/R”  
in the “Audio In” setup  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER.  
The “Playback” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings  
are underlined.  
z Hint  
The HDD contents recorded in Video mode can be  
dubbed to a disc at high speed (page 98).  
TV Type  
Select the playback picture size according to  
the type of connected TV (wide-screen/wide  
mode TV or conventional 4:3 screen TV).  
4:3 Letter Box Select this when connecting  
to a 4:3 screen TV. Displays  
a wide picture with bands  
on the upper and lower  
portions of the screen.  
4:3 Pan Scan Select this when connecting  
to a 4:3 screen TV.  
Automatically displays a  
wide picture on the entire  
screen and cuts off the  
portions that do not fit.  
16:9  
Select this when connecting  
to a wide-screen TV or TV  
with a wide mode function.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Pan Scan  
16:9  
Limitation Settings  
(Parental Lock)  
The “Parental Lock” setup allows you to set  
the password and limit the operations.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Parental Lock,” and press  
b Note  
ENTER.  
Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be  
selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or  
vice-versa.  
The “Parental Lock” setup display  
appears with the following options. The  
default settings are underlined.  
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM  
MENU.  
Pause Mode  
Selects the picture quality in pause mode.  
Field  
Frame  
Auto  
Outputs a stable, generally  
shake-free image.  
Outputs a sharp image, but  
may be prone to shake.  
Outputs a generally less  
sharp but more stable still  
image.  
Set Password/Change Password  
You can set or change the password that gives  
access to the “Channel Options” settings in  
the “Digital Tuner” setup and the “Parental  
Lock” settings.  
Seamless Playback (HDD/DVD-RW/DVD-  
R in VR mode only)  
On  
Playback is smooth, but  
with a trade-off against the  
accuracy of the edit points.  
1
Select “Set Password” or “Change  
Password” in “Parental Lock,” and press  
ENTER.  
Off  
You may notice momentary  
interruption at edited points  
during playback of a VR  
mode Playlist.  
2
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
The display for registering a password  
appears.  
Angle Indicator (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Example: when you select “Set  
Password” in step 1  
On  
Displays “  
” on the TV  
screen if various angles  
(multi-angles) for a scene  
are recorded on the disc.  
Off  
Does not display “  
the TV screen.  
” on  
,continued  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
• To change the password, enter your  
four-digit password in the “Current  
Password” row using the number  
buttons, and press ENTER. Then enter  
a new password in the “New Password”  
row using the number buttons.  
4
5
Select “Code” (geographic area) as the  
playback limitation level, and press  
ENTER.  
The area is selected.  
• When you select “Number,” press the  
number buttons to select and enter a  
country/area code in the table  
(page 168), and press ENTER.  
The password setting/password changing  
setting is completed.  
Select “Change Level,” and press  
ENTER.  
b Note  
If you forgot your password, reset the recorder  
DVD Playback (DVD VIDEO only)  
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be  
limited according to a predetermined level,  
such as the age of the users. Scenes may be  
blocked or replaced with different scenes.  
6
7
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
1
Select “DVD Playback” in “Parental  
Lock,” and press ENTER.  
To register a new password, see “Set  
Password/Change Password” on  
Select the level.  
The lower the value, the stricter the  
limitation.  
Discs rated higher than the selected level  
will be restricted.  
8
Press ENTER.  
The DVD Playback setting is completed.  
To cancel the DVD Playback setting for  
the disc, select “Off” in step 7.  
D.TV Age Limit  
Viewing of some digital TV programmes can  
be limited according to the age limit you set.  
To watch programmes that exceed the age  
limit you set, your password is required.  
(for customers in France/Denmark/Finland,  
or Sweden only)  
2
3
Select “Standard,” and press ENTER.  
1
2
3
4
Select “D.TV Age Limit” in “Parental  
Lock,” and press ENTER.  
Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.  
The “D.TV Age Limit” display appears.  
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
Select an age as limitation level, and  
press ENTER.  
The setting is completed.  
To cancel the setting, select “Off.”  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
*1  
*2  
720 x 576p  
720 x 480p  
Sends 720×576p video  
signals.  
HDMI Settings (HDMI  
Output)  
Sends 720×480p video  
signals.  
The “HDMI Output” setup allows you to  
adjust items related to the HDMI connection.  
You can select “HDMI Output” only when  
connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
*1  
720 x 576i  
720 x 480i  
Sends 720×576i video  
signals.  
*2  
Sends 720×480i video  
signals.  
*1  
*2  
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”  
is set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup  
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”  
is set to “NTSC” in the “Basic” setup (page 130).  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
3 Select “HDMI Output,” and press  
• When picture noise appears after you change the  
“Screen Resolution” setting, hold down x (stop)  
on the recorder, and press Z (open/close) on the  
recorder.  
ENTER.  
The “HDMI Output” setup appears with  
the following options. The default  
settings are underlined.  
After connecting equipment to the HDMI  
OUT jack, “Screen Resolution,” “4:3  
Video Output,” and “Colour” are  
automatically set to the appropriate  
settings.  
• When “Colour” is set to “YCbCr 4:2:2” in the  
“HDMI Output” setup, you cannot select “720 x  
576i” (or “720 x 480i”).  
4:3 Video Output  
This setting is effective only when you set  
“TV Type” to “16:9” in the “Playback” setup.  
Adjust this setting to watch 4:3 aspect ratio  
signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on  
your TV, change the setting on your TV, not  
this recorder.  
Note that this setting is effective only for  
HDMI connection.  
Full  
Select this when you can  
change the aspect ratio on  
your TV.  
Screen Resolution  
Normal  
Select this when you cannot  
change the aspect ratio on  
your TV. Shows a 4:3 size  
video with the aspect ratio  
as it is.  
Selects the type of video signals output from  
the HDMI OUT jack. If the picture is not  
clear, natural or to your satisfaction, try  
another option that suits the disc and your  
TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to the  
instruction manual supplied with the TV/  
projector, etc.  
1920 x 1080p Sends 1920×1080p video  
signals.  
16:9 aspect ratio TV  
1920 x 1080i Sends 1920×1080i video  
signals.  
1280 x 720p  
Sends 1280×720p video  
signals.  
,continued  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Colour  
HDMI Control  
Selects the method of outputting video  
signals for the HDMI jack.  
On  
Allows you to use the  
HDMI control features  
RGB (0-255)  
Outputs RGB (0-255)  
signals. Select this when  
connecting to an RGB (0-  
255) device.  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
RGB (16-235)  
Outputs RGB (16-235)  
signals. Select this if  
colours appear overly rich  
and the black appears too  
deep.  
YCbCr 4:2:2  
YCbCr 4:4:4  
Outputs 10-bit YCbCr  
4:2:2 component signals.  
Outputs 8-bit YCbCr  
4:4:4 component signals.  
b Notes  
• Some settings may not be available depending on  
the connected device.  
• When a DVI device is connected, you cannot  
select “YCbCr 4:2:2” or “YCbCr 4:4:4.”  
• When “Screen Resolution” is set to “720 x 576i”  
(or “720 x 480i”) in the “HDMI Output” setup,  
you cannot select “YCbCr 4:2:2.”  
Audio Output  
Selects the type of audio signal output from  
the HDMI OUT jack.  
Auto  
Outputs Dolby Digital,  
MPEG and DTS audio  
signals as a bitstream  
signal. Normally select  
this position.  
PCM  
Converts all audio signals  
except for DTS signals to  
PCM.  
Bitstream  
Priority  
Select this if the  
connected device is  
compatible with bitstream  
audio.  
b Notes  
• The PCM signals may not be output even when  
you select “Auto” depending on the “Audio Out”  
settings, number of audio channels, and the  
HDMI-connected device.  
• The “Audio Output” function is not available  
when a DVI device is connected.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Mode  
Changes the Command Mode of the recorder  
to avoid interference with your other Sony  
DVD recorder or player.  
Other Settings (Options)  
The “Options” and “Options 2” setups allow  
you to set up other operational settings.  
1
2
Select “Command Mode” in “Options,”  
and press ENTER.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
Select a Command Mode (DVD1,  
DVD2, or DVD3), and press ENTER.  
b Note  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.  
The remote does not function if different  
command modes are set for the recorder and  
remote. Set the same command mode.  
3 Select “Options” or “Options 2,” and  
press ENTER.  
The “Options” or “Options 2” setup  
appears with the following options. The  
default settings are underlined.  
Example: “Options” setup  
3
Set the Command Mode for the remote  
so it matches the Command Mode for the  
recorder you set above.  
Follow the steps below to set the  
Command Mode on the remote.  
1 Hold down ENTER.  
2 While holding down ENTER, enter  
the Command Mode code number  
using the number buttons.  
Command Mode Code number  
DVD1  
DVD2  
DVD3  
number button 1  
number button 2  
number button 3  
Options  
On Screen Display  
3 Hold down both the number and  
ENTER buttons at the same time for  
more than three seconds.  
On  
Automatically displays  
information on the screen  
when the recorder is turned  
on, etc.  
z Hint  
You can check the Command Mode for the recorder  
in the front panel display.  
Off  
Displays information only  
when DISPLAY is pressed.  
Command  
Mode  
In the front panel  
display  
Front Panel Display  
DVD1  
DVD2  
DVD3  
“1” appears.  
“2” appears.  
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.  
On  
Off  
Bright lighting.  
Either “1” or “2” does not  
appear.  
Turns off the lighting when  
the power is off.  
,continued  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Auto Update  
On  
SMARTLINK  
Updates the software  
automatically. Normally,  
select this position.  
ThisRecorder Allows you to use the  
Only  
SMARTLINK function  
with the recorder when the  
recorder is in standby mode.  
Off  
Does not update the  
software automatically.  
Pass Through Allows you to use the  
SMARTLINK function  
with the connected  
equipment when the  
recorder is in standby mode.  
Technical Info.  
You can check the current hardware and  
software versions of the digital tuner.  
b Note  
Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the “Basic” setup  
(page 130) to set “SMARTLINK” to “Pass  
Through.”  
Options 2  
USB  
Restart USB Device  
DivX  
Restarts the connected USB device if it does  
not respond to the recorder. If the connected  
USB device still does not work properly, try  
following:  
– Turn the connected USB device off and on  
again.  
Registration Code  
Displays the registration code of DivX video  
files for this recorder.  
For more information, go to http://  
www.divx.com/vod on the Internet.  
– Disconnect and then connect the USB  
cable.  
Set Preview (HDD only)  
Selects the thumbnail type shown in the Title  
List.  
Confirm Printer  
Displays the manufacturer and model name  
of the printer connected to the recorder. Note  
that this function may not work depending on  
the printer.  
Quick  
Preview  
Plays short excerpts from  
throughout the selected  
title.  
Normal  
Plays the selected title from  
the beginning.  
TV Pause  
Selects the tuner for the TV Pause (page 87).  
TV’s Tuner  
Selects this when  
connecting the recorder to  
your TV using the SCART  
jack.  
Software Update  
You can check the current software version  
of the built-in digital tuner and keep it up to  
date with the latest software.  
Manual Update  
Updates the software manually.  
Recorder’s  
Tuner  
Selects this when  
connecting the recorder to  
your TV not using the  
SCART jack.  
1
Select “Software Update” in “Options,”  
and press ENTER.  
2
3
4
Press “Next Screen” and press ENTER.  
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The update starts.  
To cancel, press SYSTEM MENU.  
The new software will be available next time  
the recorder is turned on.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Picture noise appears.  
, If the picture output signal from your  
recorder passes through your VCR to get to  
your TV, or if you are connected to a  
combination TV/VIDEO player, the copy-  
protection signal applied to some DVD  
programmes could affect picture quality. If  
you still experience this problem even when  
you connect your recorder directly to your  
TV, try connecting your recorder to your  
TV’s S VIDEO input.  
, You have set the recorder to progressive  
format even though your TV cannot accept  
the progressive signal. In this case, hold  
down x (stop) on the recorder, and press  
Z (open/close) on the recorder.  
Additional Information  
Troubleshooting  
If you experience any of the following  
difficulties while using the recorder, use this  
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the  
problem before requesting repairs. Should  
any problem persist, consult your nearest  
Sony dealer.  
Power  
, Even if your TV is compatible with  
progressive format (525p/625p) signals, the  
image may be affected when you set the  
recorder to progressive format. In this case,  
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and  
press Z (open/close) on the unit and the  
recorder is set to normal (interlace) format.  
, You are playing a title recorded in a colour  
system that is different from your TV.  
, Noise may appear in the pictures recorded  
on the HDD, which is due to the  
characteristics of HDD, and is not a  
malfunction.  
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the  
video and audio may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where the layers  
switch.  
The power does not turn on.  
, Check that the mains lead is connected  
securely.  
Tuner  
The channel is not found or stored or  
missed.  
, Make sure that your aerial is properly  
connected to the recorder.  
, Confirm with your dealer that you are in an  
area that can receive a digital signal.  
, Check your aerial installation.  
Picture  
There is no picture.  
There is no picture or picture noise  
appears when connected to the DV IN  
jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the i.LINK cable again.  
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.  
, The connecting cords are damaged.  
, Check the connection to your TV (page 15).  
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such  
as to “VCR” and “AV 1”) so that the signal  
from the recorder appears on the TV screen.  
, Check that the “Video In/Out” setup is set  
to the appropriate item that conforms to  
your system (page 136).  
There is no picture or picture noise appears  
when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
, If you connect the recorder to your TV via  
only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
jacks, set “Component Video Out” in the  
“Video In/Out” setup to “Progressive”  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the HDMI cord again.  
, A scrambled channel is selected.  
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the  
video and audio may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where the layers  
switch.  
,continued  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video  
output, changing the “Screen Resolution”  
setting in the “HDMI Output” setup may  
solve the problem (page 147). Connect the  
TV and the recorder using a video jack  
other than HDMI OUT, and switch the  
TV’s input to the connected video input so  
that you can see the on-screen displays.  
Change the “Screen Resolution” setting in  
the “HDMI Output” setup, and switch the  
TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture still  
does not appear, repeat the steps and try  
other options.  
TV channels cannot be changed.  
, The channel is skipped (page 134).  
, A timer recording started, which changed  
the channels.  
, The Parental Lock is activated (page 145).  
The picture from equipment connected to  
the recorder’s input jack does not appear  
on the screen.  
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE  
1/DECODER jack, select “L1” in the front  
panel display by pressing INPUT.  
, The recorder is connected to an input device  
that is not HDCP compliant (page 19).  
, When picture noise appears after you  
change the “Screen Resolution” setting,  
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and  
press Z (open/close) on the recorder.  
If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2  
IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel  
display by pressing INPUT.  
The playback picture or TV programme  
from the equipment connected through the  
recorder is distorted.  
, If the playback picture output from a DVD  
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your  
recorder before reaching your TV, the copy-  
protection signal applied to some  
TV programme reception does not fill the  
screen.  
, Set the channel manually in “Manual CH  
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup  
, Select the correct source using the INPUT  
button, or select a channel of any TV  
programme using the PROG +/– buttons.  
programmes could affect picture quality.  
Disconnect the playback equipment in  
question and connect it directly to your TV.  
The picture does not fill the screen.  
, Set “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup in  
accordance with the screen size of your TV  
The picture is breaking up.  
, The signal strength is low.  
, Check aerial installation.  
TV programme pictures are distorted.  
, Reorient the TV aerial.  
, Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction  
manual).  
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart.  
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables  
farther apart.  
The picture does not fill the screen, even  
though the picture size is set in “TV Type”  
in the “Playback” setup.  
, The picture size of the title is fixed.  
The picture is black and white.  
, Check that “LINE 3 Out” in the “Video In/  
Out” setup is set to the appropriate item that  
conforms to your system (page 136).  
, If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to  
use one that is fully wired (21 pins).  
, The aerial cable is connected to the  
AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder.  
Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack.  
, The recorder’s colour system is different  
from your TV. Hold down x (stop) on the  
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder  
to change the recorder’s colour system.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programme listings for some programme  
positions are missing.  
GUIDE Plus+ system (in the UK  
only)  
, The programme guide data may not be  
updated. Turn off the recorder and let the  
recorder receive the programme guide data.  
, Some broadcast stations support only two  
days of data. For details, see the following  
website:  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be  
received because the reception is poor.  
GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.  
, 1Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV  
programme listings do not appear until the  
recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.  
2Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug  
it. 3Wait for 24 hours. It may take several  
days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE  
Plus+ data for all programme positions. If  
the recorder does not receive the GUIDE  
Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host  
channel manually (page 69).  
, The country/region or postal code is  
incorrect. Correctly set your country/region  
and postal code (page 26).  
, When the recorder is connected to a set top  
box receiver, the set top box receiver must  
be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus+  
data.  
The programme listing is not up to date.  
, The recorder was in use during the time that  
the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled to be  
downloaded.  
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be  
received because the reception is poor.  
Sound  
, Area numbers that cannot be received using  
GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy Setup”  
in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in  
the System Menu, and follow the on-screen  
instructions to make the settings again  
There is no sound.  
, Re-connect all connections securely.  
, The connecting cord is damaged.  
, The input source setting on the audio  
component or the connection to the audio  
component is incorrect.  
, The “Time Lock” function on your cable  
box is activated. Set this function to off.  
, If the host channel has changed or moved,  
the programme guide data cannot be  
received. In this case, follow the steps in  
channel” (page 68) to update the host  
channel setting. If the problem persists after  
waiting for one day, search for the host  
channel at the following website and set the  
host channel manually (page 69).  
, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-  
forward, slow motion, or pause mode.  
, If the audio signal does not come through  
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI  
OUT jacks, check the “Audio Out” setup  
, The recorder supports only MP3 audio,  
Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX  
video files. Press AUDIO and select MP3  
audio or MPEG audio.  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
No sound is output from the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
The programme position number in the  
programme listing does not match the  
broadcast station.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the HDMI cord again.  
, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI  
device (DVI jacks do not accept audio  
signals).  
,
There may be more than one channel lineup  
for your area. To change the channel lineup,  
select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the  
GUIDE Plus+ system (page 69).  
, The equipment connected to the HDMI  
OUT jack does not conform to the audio  
signal format. In this case, set “Audio  
Output” to “PCM” in the “HDMI Output”  
,continued  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound distortion occurs.  
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio In”  
setup to “Compression” (page 137).  
Playback  
The recorder does not play any type of disc  
(except HDD).  
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with  
the labelled side facing up.  
, The disc is not correctly inserted.  
, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.  
In this case, if the recorder is on, leave it on  
(if it is off, leave it off) for about an hour  
until the moisture evaporates.  
Sound is noisy.  
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,  
noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R-  
AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 3 – TV jack, or  
LINE 1/DECODER jack (page 109).  
The sound volume is low.  
, If the disc was recorded on another recorder  
and was not finalised (page 45), the  
recorder cannot play the disc.  
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.  
The sound volume may improve if you set  
“Audio DRC” in the “Audio Out” setup to  
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio In”  
setup to “Normal” (page 137).  
The recorder does not start playback from  
the beginning.  
, Resume play was activated (page 81).  
, You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu  
or DVD menu automatically appears on the  
TV screen when it is first inserted. Use the  
menu to start playback.  
An alternate audio track cannot be  
recorded or played.  
, When recording from connected  
equipment, set “External Audio” to  
“Bilingual” in the “Audio In” setup  
The recorder starts playing automatically.  
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto  
playback function.  
, Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot  
be recorded on the HDD (when Video  
Mode On) DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video  
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video  
mode). To record the language, set  
“Bilingual Recording” in the “Audio In”  
setup to “A/L” or “B/R” before recording  
(page 138). To record both the main and sub  
sounds on a disc, record on DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (VR mode). To record on the  
HDD, set “HDD Recording Format” to  
“Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” setup  
, If you have connected an audio component  
to the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack  
and want to change the audio track for the  
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is  
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
(VR mode) during playback, set “Dolby  
Digital Output” in the “Audio Out” setup to  
“Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 138).  
Playback stops automatically.  
, If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the  
recorder stops playback at the auto pause  
signal.  
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or  
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.  
, Depending on the DVD, you may not be  
able to do some of the operations above. See  
the instruction manual supplied with the  
disc.  
The language for the sound track cannot  
be changed.  
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the  
DVD being played.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of  
the language for the sound track.  
, Try changing the language using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
The sound is breaking up.  
, The signal strength is low.  
, Check aerial installation.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The subtitle language cannot be changed  
or turned off.  
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on  
the DVD VIDEO.  
TV Pause does not work.  
, You are recording to the HDD or the HDD  
is full.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the  
subtitles.  
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
Recording/Timer recording/  
Editing  
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the  
titles recorded on this recorder.  
The programme position cannot be  
changed from the programme position you  
are recording.  
The angles cannot be changed.  
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD  
VIDEO being played.  
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”  
Recording does not start immediately  
after you press z REC.  
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”  
“FORMAT,” or “INFO WRITE”  
, You are trying to change the angles when  
” does not appear on the TV screen  
(page 80). To display “ ” if various  
angles (multi-angles) for a scene are  
recorded on the disc, set “Angle Indicator”  
to “On” in the “Playback” setup (page 145).  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing  
angles.  
, Try changing the angle using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles  
recorded on this recorder.  
disappears from the front panel display.  
Nothing was recorded even though you set  
the timer setting correctly.  
, There was a power failure during recording.  
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to  
a power failure that lasted for more than 1  
hour. Reset the clock (page 129).  
, The angles cannot be changed during slow  
motion playback or when playback is  
paused.  
, The channel was disabled after the timer  
recording was set. See “Manual CH  
, The programme position was hidden after  
the timer recording was set. (See “Disabling  
, Disconnect the mains lead from the mains,  
and connect it again.  
, The programme contains copy protection  
signals that restrict copying.  
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer  
setting (page 60, 78).  
, There is no DVD inside the recorder.  
, There is not enough disc space for the  
recording.  
, The set top box receiver was turned off.  
, The set top box controller was incorrectly  
connected (page 15).  
, The settings in “Setup” in the Menu bar  
have been changed (page 68).  
, The recorder was in the process of dubbing.  
, A scrambled channel is selected.  
, The channel activated Parental Lock is  
The DivX video files do not play.  
, The file is not created in DivX format.  
, The file has an extension other than “.avi”  
or “.divx.”  
, The DATA CD (DivX video)/DATA DVD  
(DivX video) is not created in a DivX  
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/  
Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or UDF (Universal  
Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, 2.00, or 2.01.  
, The DivX video file format is larger than  
720 (width) × 576 (height).  
The MP3 audio tracks do not play.  
, The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a  
format that the recorder can play  
The JPEG image files do not play.  
, The JPEG image files are not recorded in a  
format that the recorder can play  
, Progressive JPEG images cannot be played.  
,continued  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording does not stop immediately  
after you press x REC STOP.  
Dubbing  
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to  
input disc data before recording can stop.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
You dubbed a title, but the title did not  
appear in the HDD Title List.  
, The title contained a copy protection signal,  
so it was moved (page 99).  
High-speed dubbing is not possible.  
, The title cannot be dubbed at high speed  
(page 100). Even if A-B erasure is  
Recording does not stop after you press  
x.  
, Press x REC STOP.  
performed so that a title does not contain  
mixed picture sizes, it is still treated as a  
title with mixed picture sizes.  
Timer recording is not complete or did not  
start from the beginning.  
, There was a power failure during recording.  
If the power recovers when there is a timer  
recording, the recorder resumes recording.  
Should the power failure continue for more  
than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 129).  
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer  
setting (page 60, 78).  
HDD/DVD Dubbing is not possible.  
, The title cannot be dubbed (page 99).  
Display  
The clock has stopped.  
, Disc space was not sufficient.  
, The VPS/PDC function is working.  
, Set the clock again (page 129).  
, The clock stopped due to a power failure  
that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the  
Contents previously recorded were  
erased.  
, Data that is not playable on this recorder but  
was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be  
erased from the disc when the disc is  
inserted.  
The timer indicator is flashing.  
, The disc does not have enough space.  
, Insert a recordable disc into the recorder.  
, The inserted DVD is protected (page 44).  
The VPS/PDC function does not operate.  
, Check that the clock and date are set  
correctly.  
, Check that the VPS/PDC time you set is  
correct (there might be a mistake in the TV  
programme guide). If the broadcast you  
wanted to record did not send the correct  
VPS/PDC information, the recorder will not  
start recording.  
The clock does not appear in the front  
panel display when the recorder is turned  
off.  
, “Front Panel Display” is set to “Off” in the  
“Options” setup (page 149).  
Remote control  
, If the reception is poor, the VPS/PDC signal  
might be altered and the recorder might not  
start recording.  
, The VPS/PDC function may not work if the  
GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not  
complete.  
, The VPS/PDC function does not work  
when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being  
downloaded.  
The remote does not function.  
, Different command modes are set for the  
recorder and remote. Set the same  
command mode (page 149). The default  
command mode setting for this recorder and  
the supplied remote is DVD3. You can  
check the current command mode in the  
front panel display (page 149).  
, The batteries are weak.  
, The remote is too far from the recorder.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to  
the default setting when you replaced the  
batteries. Reset the code (page 24).  
, The remote is not pointed at the remote  
sensor on the recorder.  
The disc tray does not open and  
“TRAYLOCKED” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
Others  
“REPAIR” appears in the front panel  
display.  
The recorder does not detect a USB device  
connected to the recorder.  
, Make sure that the USB device is securely  
connected to the recorder (page 126).  
, Check if the USB device or a cable is  
damaged.  
, The recorder’s repair function is activated  
to repair the hard disk drive or disc when the  
recorder is turned on after a power failure  
has occurred during recorder operation,  
such as while recording, or when some  
errors have occurred. Leave the recorder on  
until “REPAIR” disappears from the front  
panel display.  
, Check if the USB device is on.  
Display language on the screen switches  
automatically.  
, When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the  
“HDMI Output” setup (page 148), the  
display language on the screen  
“E01” appears in the front panel display.  
, There is a problem in the HDD. Contact  
your nearest Sony dealer. Note that contents  
on the HDD may be erased when servicing  
this unit.  
automatically switches, according to the  
language setting of the connected TV, if  
you change the language settings on your  
TV, etc.  
“E02” appears in the front panel display.  
, A hard disk error has occurred and you  
cannot make a new recording to the HDD.  
Press and hold [/1 on the recorder for more  
than five seconds to turn the recorder off,  
then turn it on again. If “E02” still appears,  
format the HDD following the instructions  
of “Format HDD.” (page 128). Note that all  
of the recorded contents on the HDD will be  
erased. If this does not fix the problem,  
contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
The recorder does not operate properly.  
, Press down [/1 on the recorder for more  
than five seconds until the recorder turns  
off. Then, press [/1 again to turn on the  
recorder.  
, When static electricity, etc., causes the  
recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the  
recorder and wait until the clock appears in  
the front panel display. Then, unplug the  
recorder and after leaving it off for a while,  
plug it in again.  
“HDCP_ERR” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, The recorder is connected to an input device  
that is not HDCP compliant. Connect the  
equipment that is HDCP compliant  
The disc tray does not open after you press  
Z (open/close).  
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray  
to open after you have recorded or edited a  
DVD. This is because the recorder is adding  
disc data to the disc.  
Disregard this error message if the output  
picture is displayed correctly.  
The Parental Lock does not work.  
, Check the “D.TV Age Limit” setting in the  
“Parental Lock” setup (page 146).  
Any buttons do not function and “LOCKED”  
appears in the front panel display.  
, The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child  
,continued  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical sounds are heard when the  
recorder is off.  
Resetting the Recorder  
, While the recorder is updating the EPG  
information, operational noises (such as the  
internal fan) may be heard, even when the  
power is off. This is not a malfunction.  
, While the recorder is adjusting the clock for  
the Auto Clock Set function or updating the  
EPG information, operational noises may  
be heard, even when the power is off. This  
is not a malfunction.  
You can reset the recorder to all its factory  
settings.  
1 Make sure that the recorder is turned  
on and remove the disc.  
2 Hold down x (stop) on the recorder  
and press [/1 on the recorder.  
All settings are reset and the recorder  
turns off.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notes about the discs  
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its  
edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,  
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may  
cause it to malfunction.  
Notes About This  
Recorder  
On operation  
• If the recorder is brought directly from a  
cold to a warm location, or is placed in a  
very damp room, moisture may condense  
on the lenses inside the recorder. Should  
this occur, the recorder may not operate  
properly. In this case, if the recorder is on,  
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about  
an hour until the moisture evaporates.  
• When you move the recorder, take out any  
discs and do not apply shock or vibration to  
the hard disk drive to avoid damaging the  
disc or hard disk drive (page 3).  
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or  
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave  
it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the  
temperature may rise considerably inside  
the car.  
• After playing, store the disc in its case.  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe  
the disc from the centre out.  
On adjusting volume  
Do not turn up the volume while listening to  
a section with very low level inputs or no  
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be  
damaged when a peak level section is played.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,  
thinner, commercially available cleaners, or  
anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.  
• Do not use the following discs.  
– A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,  
card, heart).  
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.  
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker  
adhesive on it.  
On cleaning  
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a  
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild  
detergent solution. Do not use any type of  
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent  
such as alcohol or benzine.  
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners  
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens  
cleaners (including wet or spray types).  
These may cause the recorder to  
malfunction.  
On replacement of parts  
In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired  
parts may be collected for reuse or recycling  
purposes.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Inputs and outputs  
LINE 2 OUT  
Specifications  
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms  
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p  
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)  
LINE 2 IN  
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than  
22 kilohms  
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p  
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)  
System  
Laser: Semiconductor laser  
Transmission standards (Digital  
broadcasting): DVB-T  
Channel coverage (Digital  
broadcasting):  
VHF: E5 to E12, F5 to F10, Italian D to  
H2  
UHF: E21 to E69, B21 to B68, F21 to  
F69  
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin  
CVBS OUT  
Channel coverage (Analogue  
broadcasting):  
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)  
LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin  
CVBS IN/OUT  
PAL (B/G, D/K, I)/SECAM (L)  
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10,  
Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South  
Africa 4 to 11, 13  
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to  
B69, F21 to F69  
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France  
B to Q  
HYPER: S21 to S41  
S-Video/RGB IN  
Decoder  
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100  
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/  
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR):  
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
P
B/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p  
The above channel coverage merely ensures  
the channel reception within these ranges. It  
does not guarantee the ability to receive  
signals in all circumstances. For details, see  
G-LINK: mini jack  
HDMI OUT: HDMI 19-pin-Standard  
Connector  
USB:  
USB jack Type A (For connecting  
digital still camera, Memory card  
reader and USB memory)  
USB jack Type B (For connecting  
PictBridge-compatible printers)  
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer  
system  
Audio reception: Split carrier system  
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial  
socket  
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer  
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/  
Power back-up duration: 1 hour  
Video recording format: MPEG-2,  
MPEG-1  
Audio recording format/applicable  
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch  
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and  
SEP mode), PCM  
General  
Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,  
50/60 Hz  
Power consumption: 49 W  
Dimensions (approx.):  
430 × 76.5 × 286 mm (width/height/  
depth) incl. projecting parts  
Hard disk drive capacity:  
RDR-HXD770: 120 GB  
RDR-HXD870: 160 GB  
RDR-HXD970: 250 GB  
RDR-HXD1070: 500 GB  
Mass (approx.): 4.7 kg  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC  
Operating humidity: 25% to 80%  
Supplied accessories:  
Mains lead (1)  
Notes on MP3 Audio  
Tracks, JPEG Image  
Files, and DivX Video  
Files  
Aerial cable (1)  
Remote commander (remote) (1)  
Set top box controller (1)  
R6 (size AA) batteries (2)  
Specifications and design are subject to  
change without notice.  
About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG  
image files, and DivX video  
files  
MP3 is an audio compression technology that  
satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations.  
JPEG is an image compression technology.  
You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)  
format audio tracks and JPEG image files on  
the HDD or DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/  
CD-RWs) or JPEG image files on the HDD  
or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs).  
®
DivX is a video file compression  
technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This  
®
product is an official DivX Certified  
product. You can play DATA CDs (CD-  
ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) and DATA DVDs  
(DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs) that contain DivX video files.  
DATA DVDs must be recorded according to  
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or  
UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50,  
2.00*, or 2.01 format for the recorder to  
recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files,  
and DivX video files.  
DATA CDs must be recorded according to  
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet  
format for the recorder to recognise the MP3  
tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video  
files.  
You can also play discs recorded in  
MultiSession/Border.  
See the instructions supplied with the disc  
drives and the recording software (not  
supplied) for details on the recording format.  
* Not available for MP3 audio tracks.  
Note on MultiSession/Border discs  
If audio tracks and images in Music CD  
format or Video CD format are recorded in  
the first session/border, only the first session/  
border will be played back.  
,continued  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in  
mp3PRO format.  
MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image  
files, or DivX video files that  
the recorder can play  
• The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of a  
size larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/4 GB.  
• The recorder may not play a DivX video file  
when the file has been combined from two or  
more DivX video files.  
The recorder can play the following tracks  
and files:  
– MP3 audio tracks with the extension  
“.mp3.”  
– JPEG image files with the extension “.jpeg”  
or “.jpg.”  
– Baseline JPEG image files that conform to  
the Exif 2.2* image files format, and  
Y:CB:CR is 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0.  
– DivX video files with the extension “.avi”  
or “.divx.”  
Notes on copying JPEG image files/MP3  
audio tracks  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files/MP3 audio  
tracks to the HDD if:  
– The total number of JPEG image albums on the  
HDD exceeds 999.  
– The total number of JPEG image files/MP3  
audio tracks under an album exceeds 999.  
– The MP3 audio tracks are 1 GB or larger.  
• Note that the size of JPEG image files copied to  
the HDD may be automatically increased to fit the  
TV screen.  
* “Exchangeable Image File Format”: The file  
format used by digital still cameras.  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files onto a DATA  
DVD finalised on other recorders or devices.  
• If a warning message indicating that the HDD is  
full appears, erase several albums or files to make  
space. For details on erasing tracks or files, see  
z Hint  
Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start  
playback, it is recommended that you create albums  
with no more than two trees.  
b Notes  
• The recorder will play any data with the extension  
“.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or “.divx” even if  
they are not in MP3, JPEG, or DivX format.  
Playing these data may generate a loud noise  
which could damage your speaker system.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may not  
be possible. For example, the picture may be  
unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the  
sound may skip, and so on.  
• Depending on the disc, playback may take some  
time to start.  
• Some files cannot be played.  
• For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files, the  
recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a  
DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to 99 tracks and  
files under an album can be played.  
• For JPEG image files, the recorder can load up to  
99 albums and/or up to 999 files under an album  
on a DATA CD/DATA DVD or the connected  
USB device at a time. To view unloaded albums,  
reload them.  
• Proceeding to the next or another album may take  
some time.  
• The image size that can be displayed is limited.  
The following image sizes can be displayed:  
width 160–5,120 pixels by height 120–3,840  
pixels.  
• This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks  
recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.  
• No more than a 1 GB MP3 audio track can be  
played.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i.LINK baud rate  
About i.LINK  
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies  
according to the equipment. Three maximum  
baud rates are defined:  
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)  
The DV IN jack on this recorder is i.LINK-  
compliant for digital video cameras. This  
section describes the i.LINK standard and its  
features.  
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)  
What is i.LINK?  
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications”  
in the instruction manual of each equipment.  
It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on  
some equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on  
which it is not indicated such as this unit is  
“S100.”  
When units are connected to equipment  
having a different maximum baud rate, the  
baud rate sometimes differs from the  
indicated baud rate.  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for  
handling digital video, digital audio and other  
data in two directions between equipment  
having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling  
other equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be  
connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data  
transactions with various digital AV  
equipment. When two or more i.LINK-  
compatible equipment are connected to this  
recorder in a daisy chain, operations and data  
transactions are possible with not only the  
equipment that this recorder is connected to  
but also with other devices via the directly  
connected equipment.  
* What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the  
amount of data that can be sent or received in one  
second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps  
means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in  
one second.  
Note, however, that the method of operation  
sometimes varies according to the  
characteristics and specifications of the  
equipment to be connected, and that  
operations and data transactions are  
sometimes not possible on some connected  
equipment.  
i.LINK functions on this  
recorder  
For details on how to dub when this recorder  
is connected to other video equipment having  
DV jacks, see page 104.  
The DV jack on this recorder can only input  
DVC-SD signals. It cannot output signals.  
The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV  
signals from equipment such as a MICRO  
MV digital video camera with an i.LINK  
jack.  
For further precautions, see the notes on  
For details on precautions when connecting  
this recorder, also see the instruction manuals  
for the equipment to be connected.  
b Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be  
connected to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV  
connecting cable). When connecting this recorder  
to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or  
more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), see the instruction  
manual of the equipment to be connected.  
About the name “i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394  
data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is  
a trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard  
standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers.  
Required i.LINK cable  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable.  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Guide to Parts and Controls  
For more information, see the pages in parentheses.  
Remote  
J TV/DVD button (24)  
K SUBTITLE button (82)  
(text) button (51)  
L
M MENU button (80)  
N Colour buttons (48, 65)  
O SYSTEM MENU button (76, 85, 100,  
TITLE LIST button (38, 80, 92)  
TOP MENU button (80)  
GUIDE button (48, 63)  
P TIMER button (53, 60)  
Q INFO (information) button (48, 63)  
R </M/m/,/ENTER button (26)  
S O RETURN button (26)  
EXIT button (131)  
T DISPLAY button (40)  
U
/
(instant replay/instant  
advance) buttons (82)  
V ./>(previous/next)buttons(82,  
PAGE +/– buttons (48, 65)  
W mc  
/
CM (search/slow/  
freeze frame) buttons (82, 108, 115)  
DAY +/– buttons (65)  
A HDD button (36)  
DVD button (36)  
X H (play) button (80, 108, 124)  
X (pause) button (82, 108, 115, 124)  
x (stop) button (80, 108, 114, 124)  
The H button has a tactile dot*.  
B [/1 (on/standby) button (26)  
C Z (open/close) button (36)  
D PROG (programme) +/– buttons (36)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
Y TV PAUSE button (87)  
E Number buttons (42, 89)  
Z z REC button (36)  
The number 5 button has a tactile dot*.  
x REC STOP button (36)  
HDD/DVD DUB button (99)  
REC MODE button (36)  
F INPUT (input select) button (61, 79)  
G AUDIO button (82, 108)  
The AUDIO button has a tactile dot*.  
wj ZOOM button (124)  
H CLEAR button (42, 84, 109, 110)  
wk TV [/1 (on/standby) button (24)  
I ANGLE button (80, 125)  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
wl PLAY MODE button (84, 89, 109,  
es TV PROG (programme) +/– buttons  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
e; TV t (input select) button (24)  
ea TV 2(volume) +/– buttons (24)  
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating  
the recorder.  
Front panel  
A [/1 (on/standby) button (26)  
K PROGRAM +/– buttons (36)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
B
(remote sensor) (24)  
L INPUT (input select) button (61, 79)  
C Disc tray (36)  
M LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/  
D Front panel display (166)  
E Z (open/close) button (36)  
L(MONO) AUDIO R) jacks (32)  
N ONE-TOUCH DUB button (106)  
F N (play) button (80, 108, 124)  
O
P
DV IN jack (104)  
The N button has a tactile dot*.  
USB jack (type A) (112, 118)  
G x (stop) button (80, 108, 114, 124)  
H z REC button (36)  
Q PictBridge USB jack (type B) (126)  
I x REC STOP button (36)  
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating  
the recorder.  
J HDD button/indicator (36)  
DVD button/indicator (36)  
,continued  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front panel display  
A Displays the following:  
• Playing time  
D Timer indicator (73)  
E Disc type  
• Current title/chapter/track/index  
number  
• Recording time/recording mode  
• Clock  
• Programme position  
• EPG indication (63)  
“EPG” appears when receiving the  
GUIDE Plus+ data.  
• TV Direct Rec. indication (36):  
“TV” appears in the right most two  
digits.  
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or  
DVD-RW disc is loaded.  
F Command Mode indicator (149)  
Displays the Command Mode of the  
remote.  
When the Command Mode for the  
recorder is set to DVD3 (default), either  
“1” or “2” does not appear.  
G Recording status  
H Dubbing direction indicator  
I Playing status  
B NTSC indicator (130, 137)  
CVPS/PDC indicator (78)  
Rear panel  
A ANALOG AERIAL IN/OUT jacks  
F HDMI OUT (high-definition  
multimedia interface out) jack (19, 22)  
B LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO)  
G DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (22)  
H AC IN terminal (23)  
jacks (19, 22)  
C LINE 1/DECODER jack (31)  
I LINE 3 – TV jack (19)  
D G-LINK jack (17)  
J LINE 2 OUT (S VIDEO) jack (19)  
E DIGITAL AERIAL IN/OUT jacks  
K COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) jacks (19)  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Language Code List  
For details, see page 140.  
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.  
Number Language  
(code)  
Number Language  
(code)  
Number Language  
(code)  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Country/Area Code  
For details, see page 145.  
Number  
Area (Code)  
Number  
Area (Code)  
0118  
0121  
0120  
0205  
0218  
0301  
0312  
0314  
0411  
0609  
0618  
0405  
0811  
0914  
0904  
0920  
1016  
1118  
Argentina (ar)  
Australia (au)  
Austria (at)  
Belgium (be)  
Brazil (br)  
Canada (ca)  
Chile (cl)  
1325  
1324  
1412  
1426  
1415  
1611  
1608  
1620  
1821  
1907  
0519  
1905  
0308  
2023  
2008  
0702  
2119  
Malaysia (my)  
Mexico (mx)  
Netherlands (nl)  
New Zealand (nz)  
Norway (no)  
Pakistan (pk)  
Philippines (ph)  
Portugal (pt)  
Russia (ru)  
Singapore (sg)  
Spain (es)  
Sweden (se)  
Switzerland (ch)  
Taiwan (tw)  
Thailand (th)  
United Kingdom (gb)  
USA (us)  
China (cn)  
Denmark (dk)  
Finland (fi)  
France (fr)  
Germany (de)  
Hong Kong (hk)  
India (in)  
Indonesia (id)  
Italy (it)  
Japan (jp)  
Korea (kr)  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Auto Clock Set 27, 129  
“Auto Language” 140  
“Auto Scan” 133  
Controlling TVs with the  
remote 24  
“Copy” 119  
Index  
“Auto Skip” 132  
“Copy Album” 113  
“Copy Album Contents”  
Words in quotations appear  
in the on-screen displays.  
B
Copy control signals 53,  
“Basic” 128, 129  
Numerics  
“16:9” 144  
“4:3 Letter Box” 144  
“4:3 Pan Scan” 144  
“96 kHz PCM Output” 139  
Batteries 24  
“Copy to DVD” 120  
Copy-Free 53, 72  
Copying  
“Bilingual Recording” 138  
Bilingual recording 72  
‘BRAVIA’ Theatre Sync  
audio tracks 112  
JPEG image files 118,  
A
C
“A-B Erase” 93  
“A-B Repeat” 84, 109  
“Add New Channels” 131  
Adjusting  
Copy-Never 53, 72  
Copy-Once 53, 72  
Country/Area code 168  
CPRM 11  
Canal Plus 33  
“CH System” 134  
“Change Genre” 93  
“Change Password” 145  
“Channel” 134  
“Channel Options” 132  
“Channel Sort” 131  
“Channel Swapping” 135  
Chapter 41, 59, 77  
Chapter number 41  
“Chapter Search” 89  
Chase Play 88  
playback picture 85  
recording picture 59,  
Creating a Playlist 96  
D
Aerial 15  
“AFT” 134  
Album List 114  
“Genre” 114  
“D.TV Age Limit” 146  
“D.TV Language” 132  
DATA CD 12  
DATA DVD 12  
“Decoder” 34, 134  
DIGITAL OUT  
(COAXIAL) 22  
Digital Services  
Digital Text viewing  
EPG 48  
Programme  
information 49  
“Digital Tuner” 131  
Disc settings 43, 45, 47,  
“Set Skip” 115  
“Sort Titles” 114  
“Album Name” 117  
“Album Search” 111  
“Alternate Search” 58  
“Analog Tuner” 133  
“Analog Tuner Level” 137  
ANGLE 80, 125  
“Angle Indicator” 80, 145  
AUDIO 82, 108  
Audio cord 22  
“Audio DRC” 139  
“Audio In” 137  
Audio input 23  
“Audio Language” 140  
“Audio Out” 138  
“Auto” 129  
“Auto Channel Setting”  
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/  
+RW)” 143  
“Auto Chapter (HDD/  
VR)” 143  
“Auto Chapter (Video)”  
Checking/changing/  
cancelling timer settings  
Child Lock 81, 108  
“Clock Setting” 27, 129  
“Combine” 96, 97  
“Command Mode” 25, 149  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT 20  
“Component Video Out”  
“Confirm Printer” 150  
Connecting  
“Disc Setup” 43, 45, 47,  
Disc space 92  
Disc types 10, 91  
“Divide” 94, 95, 97  
DivX video files 80  
Dolby Digital 22, 138  
“Download from TV” 133  
DTS 22, 139  
a printer 126  
the aerial cable 15  
the audio cords 22  
the HDMI cord 19, 22  
the set top box  
controller 15  
Dubbing  
the USB device 112,  
Dubbing List 100  
HDD/DVD DUB 99  
the video cords 19  
,continued  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DV camcorder 104  
DV camcorder dubbing 104  
“Manual Dubbing”  
Freeze Frame 83  
Front panel 165  
“Front Panel Display” 149  
Front panel display 166  
M
Main sound 72, 138  
Mains lead 23  
Making a backup disc 103  
Managing  
“One-Touch  
Dubbing” 106  
“Playback” 107  
DV IN 104  
G
audio tracks on the  
Music Jukebox  
“Genre Name” 93, 117  
“Grid” 63  
“DV Input” 105, 138  
“DVD Backup” 103  
“DVD Menu Language”  
“DVD Playback” 146  
DVD VIDEO 12  
DVD+R 10, 91  
DVD+RW 10, 91  
DVD-R 10, 91  
DVD-RAM 12  
DVD-RW 10, 91  
GUIDE 63  
JPEG image files 125  
“Manual” 129  
GUIDE Plus+ system 63,  
“Manual CH Setting” 133  
Manual Clock Set 27, 129  
“Manual Dubbing” 106  
“Manual Rec. Mode” 141  
Manual recording mode  
H
Handling discs 159  
“HDD Recording Format”  
MENU 80  
Menu  
HDMI  
“4:3 Video Output”  
“Audio Output” 148  
“Colour” 148  
“HDMI Control” 148  
“Screen Resolution”  
DVD’s Menu 80  
Top menu 80  
“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” 138  
“Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)” 138  
“Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)” 138  
“Modify” 60  
E
Easy Setup 26, 130  
“Edit” 92, 117  
Editing 91, 96  
chapters 95  
“Move” 97  
HDMI cord 19, 22  
HDMI OUT 20, 22  
“HDMI Output” 147  
“HELP Setting” 130  
Playlist 96  
titles 92  
“Editor” 64  
Enter characters 42  
EPG  
MP3 audio tracks 108  
MPEG 22, 139  
“Multi-Mode” 93  
“Music Jukebox” 112  
“My TV” 63  
I
Viewing a list of  
available  
i.LINK 163  
N
“Info” 64  
channels 48  
“Name” 134  
INPUT 61, 79  
“Input Colour System”  
“EPG Link” 58  
“EPG Type Select” 130  
“Erase” 60, 92, 93, 117,  
“Erase Album” 125  
“External Audio” 138  
“New Album” 125  
NICAM 72, 137  
“NICAM Select” 137  
“NTSC on PAL TV” 137  
Number buttons 43  
“Input Line System” 130  
J
JPEG image files 118  
Jukebox 112  
O
F
“On Screen Display” 149  
ONE-TOUCH DUB 106  
One-Touch Dubbing 106  
One-Touch Play 21, 81  
“Optimise HDD” 128  
“Options” 149  
“Finalise” 45  
Finalising 45  
“Format” 47  
L
Labelling 43  
“Language” 140  
“LINE 1 In” 137  
LINE 1/DECODER 31  
LINE 2 IN 32  
“LINE 3 Out” 136  
“Format DVD-RW” 128  
“Format HDD.” 128  
Formatting 47  
“Frame Accurate Editing”  
Original 39, 91  
“OSD Language” 140  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing JPEG image files  
“Registration Code” 150  
Remaining time 41  
Remote 24, 164  
P
Page mode 39, 114, 123  
Parental Lock 81, 145  
Parts and controls 164  
Pause Live TV 87  
“Pause Mode” 145  
PAY-TV 33  
“Programme” 85, 110, 116  
Programme information 49  
“Progressive” 28  
“Protect” 93, 126  
“Protect Album Contents”  
“Rename Album” 126  
“Rename File” 126  
“Repeat” 84, 109, 115  
“Repeat Album” 109, 115  
“Repeat Chapter” 84  
“Repeat Disc” 84, 109  
“Repeat Programme” 84,  
PBC 80  
PDC 54, 78  
“Protect Disc” 44  
Protection  
“Photo Album” 118  
“Photo Album” list 122  
“Picture Adjustment” 76,  
album 126  
disc 44  
JPEG image file 126  
title 93  
“Repeat Title” 84  
“Repeat Track” 84, 109,  
“Replace Channels” 131  
Resettingtherecorder 130,  
Picture quality 59, 76, 85  
PLAY MODE 84, 85,  
“Play Mode” 117  
Play mode  
Q
Quick guide to disc types  
“Restart USB Device” 150  
Resume Play 81  
Quick Timer 58, 75  
“A-B Repeat” 84, 109  
“Programme” 85,  
“RGB” 136, 137  
Rotate 125  
R
“Repeat” 84, 109, 115  
Playable discs 10, 12  
“Playback” 107, 144  
Playback 10, 80, 108,  
Rear panel 166  
REC 36  
S
S VIDEO 20  
REC MODE 71  
REC STOP 36, 106  
“Rec. Mode Adjust” 55,  
Scan Audio 80  
“Schedule” 63  
“Seamless Playback” 145  
“Search” 63  
“A-B Repeat” 84, 109  
DivX video files 80  
DV camcorder 107  
fast forward 82, 108,  
“Recommendation  
Search” 58  
Searching  
audio track 108, 115  
by genre 39, 114  
fast reverse/fast  
forward 82, 108,  
JPEG image file 124  
locating the beginning  
of the title/  
Recordable discs 10  
“Recording” 141  
Recording 52, 71  
picture adjustment 59,  
fast reverse 82, 108,  
freeze frame 83  
instant advance 82  
instant replay 82  
JPEG image files 122  
Jukebox 114  
recording format 10  
recording mode 37,  
chapter/track 82,  
recording time 37, 52,  
MP3 audio tracks 108  
“Programme” 85,  
scan audio 80  
Series Recording 57  
while watching  
another  
“Series Recording” 57  
“Series Search” 58  
“Set Genre” 93, 117  
“Set Password” 145  
“Set Preview” 150  
“Set Skip” 115, 117  
“Set Thumbnail” 92, 143  
Set top box controller 15,  
“Repeat” 84, 109, 115  
resume play 81  
programme 37  
Recording mode 37, 52,  
Recording time 37, 52, 71  
Recovery Recording 54,  
rotate 125  
scan audio 80  
slow-motion play 83  
zoom 124  
Playlist 39, 91  
“Power Save” 130  
Region code 13  
,continued  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set top box receiver 17  
Setting up the GUIDE  
Plus+ system 28  
Timer recording  
check/change/cancel  
U
“Undo” 93  
“Unfinalise” 46  
Unfinalising 46  
“Unprotected” 93  
Usable discs 10, 12  
“Setup” 64  
EPG timer setting 55  
GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Signal Check” 132  
SimultaneousRecandPlay  
“Skip” 134  
“Skip Once” 60  
manual setting 53, 74  
“Rec. Mode Adjust”  
V
“Video” 136, 137  
VIDEO CD 12  
Video cord 19  
“Video In/Out” 136  
Video input 20  
Video mode 10  
“Video Mode Compatible  
Editing” 92  
Slideshow 124  
“Timing” 78  
Title 41  
Title List 38  
Slow-motion play 83  
SMARTLINK 21, 150  
“Software Update” 150  
“Sort Titles” 39, 114  
“Sound System” 134  
Split Programmes 58  
“Standard (4:3)” 28  
“Stereo 1” 138  
“Genre” 39  
“Sort Titles” 39  
Thumbnail 39  
“Title Name” 92  
Title number 41  
“Title Search” 89  
TOP MENU 80  
VPS 54, 78  
VR mode 10  
“Stereo 2” 138  
Sub sound 72, 138  
“Track Name” 117  
“Track Search” 89, 111  
Troubleshooting 151  
“TV Direct Rec.” 21, 37  
“TV Pause” 150  
TV Pause 87  
W
SUBTITLE 82  
“Wide (16:9)” 28  
“Subtitle Display” 140  
“Subtitle Language” 140  
“Subtitle Recording” 143  
Super VIDEO CD 12  
“S-Video” 136, 137  
Z
Zoom 124  
ZWEITON 72  
“TV Screen Size” 28  
TV system 134  
TV t 24, 37  
T
“TV Type” 144  
Thumbnail picture 39  
preview mode 40, 150  
“Time Search” 89  
TIMER 54  
TV/DVD 25, 37  
Timer List 60  
Sony Corporation Printed in Hungary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Scanner MX 5500N User Manual
Sigma Camera Flash EF 530 User Manual
SIIG Computer Keyboard 04 0998A User Manual
Sony Digital Photo Frame HDMS S1D User Manual
Sony Projector VPL CX4 User Manual
Sony Speaker WS TV10C User Manual
Soundolier Speaker System Maestro Wireless Speaker Lamp User Manual
Sterling Marine Battery 8820037900 User Manual
SVA Computer Monitor 2400W BD User Manual
Sylvania Flat Panel Television LC320SS1 User Manual